Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Camera User Guide
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at
right.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
ENGLISH
© CANON INC. 2017
CT0-D123-A
1
Before Use
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Conventions in This Guide
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
Camera Basics
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
Continuous ring (2) on front
Front dial (3) on front
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights. Note that restrictions may apply
even when such photographing or recording is intended solely for
personal use.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
]
]
]
]
Up button (11) on back
Left button (12) on back
Right button (18) on back
Down button (19) on back
Control dial (16) on back
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Customer Support Help Desk.
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
●
●
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
: Indicates touch-screen operations
● Although the screen (monitor) and viewfinder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
Accessories
● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Appendix
Index
3
Before Use
Part Names
( )
9
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
15
( )
1
( )
2
( )
3
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
10
)
16
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )(
)
(
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
15
)
(
(
(
)
)
(
17
(
18
(
19
11
12
)
11
(
12
)
(
)
)
13
( )
4
(
14
(
20
)
Camera Basics
( )
5
( )
3
( )
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
( )
4
5
(
16
)
(
17
)
)
18
( )
( )
7
6
(
)
13
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
8
( )
1
(1) Screen (monitor)*2
(2) Viewfinder
(12)
[
(Macro)] / [
/ Left button
(13) Indicator / USB charge lamp
(Manual focus)]
(
)
14
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(3) Power button
(1) Lens
(9) Hot shoe
(10) Diopter adjustment dial
(14)
(15)
[
[
(Playback)] button
(4) Remote switch terminal
(5) DIGITAL terminal
(6) HDMITM terminal
(2) Continuous ring
(3) Front dial
(AF frame selector)] button
(11) Mode dial release button
(12) Mode dial
(16) Control dial
(4) Zoom lever
(17)
(18)
(19)
[
[
[
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(Flash)] / Right button
(Information)] /
(7)
[
(Wi-Fi)] button
Shooting:[
[
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(13) Speaker
(8) Serial number (Body number)
(9) Movie button
(14) Lamp
Playback:[ (magnify)] /
(15) Microphone
[
(index)]
Down button
Accessories
(10)
(11)
[
(AE lock)] button
(16)
(N-Mark)*1
(5) Strap mount
(20)
[ ] button
[
[
(Drive mode)] /
(17) Tripod socket
(6) Exposure compensation dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Flash
Appendix
(Single-image erase)] /
(18) Memory card/battery cover
Up button
Index
z You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
4
Before Use
Table of Contents
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
12
Applying special effects
Smooth Skin
Before Use
Common Camera Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Monochrome
Soft Focus
( 62)
Shoot
(
(
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
Camera Basics
● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
Fish-Eye Effect
Like Oil Paintings
Like Watercolor Paintings
Auto Mode /
-
(
(
( 64)
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Shoot panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
-
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Toy Camera Effect
Miniature Effect
Shooting people well
(
(
● Focus on faces
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
-
Portraits
● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
(
-
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
Matching specific scenes
-
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
● Convey a sense of speed with a blurred background
Handheld Night
Under Water
Fireworks
Starry Skies
Accessories
(
(
( 67)
-
Appendix
Index
13
View
Save
Before Use
● View images (Playback Mode)
● Save images to a computer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
-
-
Using Wi-Fi Features
● Send images to a smartphone
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
● On a TV
Camera Basics
-
-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● On a computer
● Share images online
-
-
● Browse through images quickly
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Send images to a computer
-
-
● Erase images
-
● Create an album automatically
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
-
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
-
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
Print
● Print pictures
Accessories
Appendix
-
Index
14
● Observe the following instructions when using commercially available
batteries or provided battery packs.
Before Use
Safety Instructions
- Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
- Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery
chargers.
- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with
metallic pins or other metal objects.
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING
Camera Basics
- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
● Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals
with tape or other means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
● Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use
with the product.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or
clothing, flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of
eye contact, flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water
and seek immediate medical assistance.
● Do not disassemble or modify the product.
● Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
● Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC
adapter.
● Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as
the presence of smoke or a strange smell.
- Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power
outlet using a dry cloth.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner
to clean the product.
- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
● Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into
the product.
- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the
power outlet.
● Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
- Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come
into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
● Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
Accessories
● Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power
outlet during lightning storms.
● For products featuring a viewfinder, do not look through the viewfinder
at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and
other strong artificial light sources.
Appendix
● Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break
or modify the power cord.
This may harm your vision.
Index
● Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or
shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.
● Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods
of time.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
15
● Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin
for extended periods of time during use.
Before Use
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
CAUTION
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness
and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or
similar equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places
and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is
forbidden.
Camera Basics
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect
of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
Denotes the risk of injury.
CAUTION
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
It may hurt the eyes.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any
product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product.
Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong
impacts.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
● Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
● Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other
part of your body, and objects away from the flash unit while taking
pictures.
Accessories
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
Appendix
● Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low
temperatures.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
Index
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury
when touched.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
16
Before Use
Touch-Screen Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Camera Basics
Basic Guide
Touch the screen briefly with your
finger.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Basic Operations
z This gesture is used to shoot, configure
camera functions, and so on.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Dragging
Touch the screen and move your finger
across it.
z This gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnified image area, among other
operations.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Before Use
z Thread the smaller loop through the lens
cap to attach it as shown, and then attach
the lens cap cord to the strap.
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
( )
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( )
1
Camera Basics
Attach the strap adapter.
1
z Attach the included strap adapter to the
camera as shown.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap adapter the same way.
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Attach the strap.
z Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the strap when the cap is not
in use.
( )
2
5
z Attach the included strap to the strap
adapter as shown.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
( )
4
( )
( )
3
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
2
z Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
( )
1
Holding the Camera
( )
1
Attach the lens cap.
3
z Place the strap around your neck.
z Remove the lens cap from the lens
momentarily.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Accessories
( )
2
Appendix
( )
1
Index
18
Charging the Battery Pack
Before Use
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
●
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Insert the battery pack.
1
( )
1
Camera Basics
z After aligning the
marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
( )
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Charge the battery pack.
2
( )
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
2
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
( )
1
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
CB-2LH
As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
z When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
CB-2LHE
Remove the battery pack.
3
( )
1
Accessories
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
( )
2
Appendix
Index
19
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
3
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
Before Use
( )
1
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
( )
2
Camera Basics
Open the cover.
1
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
2
Close the cover.
4
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
( )
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Insert the battery pack.
2
( )
1
z Holding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
( )
2
( )
1
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
( )
3
Accessories
Appendix
Index
20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
Before Use
z You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder.
When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
Remove the memory card.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
and then slowly release it.
choose [Reverse Display] on the [ 1] tab, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
z The memory card will pop up.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Setting the Date and Time
Using the Screen
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
z Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
( )
1
( )
2
z Close the screen in this orientation (3).
( )
3
Accessories
Turn the camera on.
1
z Press the power button.
Appendix
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
●
The screen can only open to approximately 180° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
Index
21
Set the date and time.
2
Changing the Date and Time
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
]
Access the menu screen.
1
z Press the [
] button.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Choose [Date/Time].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
Specify your home time zone.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
[
] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
Finish the setup process.
4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
Change the date and time.
3
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
z Press the [
menu screen.
] button to close the
●
●
●
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
Accessories
●
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
Appendix
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●
●
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if the camera is left off.
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
Index
You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
].
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [
22
Display Language
Before Use
Trying the Camera Out
Change the display language as needed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,
and viewing them.
Enter Playback mode.
1
z Press the [
] button.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
2
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
Turn the camera on.
] button.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
Set the display language.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Enter [
] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Accessories
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
●
●
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
Appendix
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
] button.
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
Index
Zoom in or out, as needed.
3
You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ 3] tab.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
●
You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
23
Shoot.
4
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
Before Use
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
( )
1
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
z If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
2) Stop recording.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Playback
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Accessories
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Enter Playback mode.
1
Appendix
z Press the [
] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
Index
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
Choose images.
2
Before Use
●
You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] dial clockwise.
Erasing Images
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
Camera Basics
browse through images quickly.
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an image to erase.
1
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Erase the image.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
z Movies are identified by a [
] icon.
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
To play movies, go to step 3.
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
]
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
]
Play movies.
3
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is finished, [ ] is displayed.
]
●
Appendix
[
Index
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
z To adjust the volume, press the [ ][
]
buttons during playback.
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
25
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
z Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Camera Basics
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
on and view your shots.
] button to turn the camera
Camera Basics
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
]
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
●
●
●
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
Before Use
Shutter Button
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
The screen is automatically deactivated after about a minute of inactivity,
and in another minute, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off.
To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Camera Basics
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
(
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
●
●
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Accessories
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Appendix
Index
27
Before Use
Viewfinder
●
Although the viewfinder is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting is easier with a viewfinder, which helps you concentrate on
keeping subjects in focus.
●
●
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
Switch between using the screen
and viewfinder as needed.
1
Camera Basics
The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
z Moving the viewfinder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
tab > [Display settings] > [Display Control] > [Manual] and then
[Manual display] > [Viewfinder].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Display of shooting information will not be adjusted when you
z Moving the viewfinder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
[
1] tab > [Shooting information display] > [VF vertical display]
> [Off].
Adjust the diopter.
●
●
●
Display switches from the viewfinder to the camera screen for
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
some features.
z Turn the dial to bring viewfinder images
into sharp focus.
and camera screen separately.
tab > [VF display format] > [Display 2].
●
The viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
28
Before Use
Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. As you turn it, hold
down the mode dial release button in the middle of the dial.
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic level.
To configure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab >
( )
1
●
●
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
Camera Basics
( )
2
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing
the camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
( )
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
4
(1) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
(3) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specific scenes, or add a variety of
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(2) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(4) Movie Mode
(
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
29
Before Use
Quick Set Menu
●
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure commonly used functions in the
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(Quick Set) menu.
You can also exit by choosing [ ] in the menu items and
pressing the [ ] button.
(
Access the
menu.
1
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
Choose a menu item.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z You can access the screen for options
( )
1
( )
2
labeled with a [
].
] icon by touching
[
Choose an option.
3
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can
]
]
be configured by pressing the [
button.
Accessories
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can be
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
Appendix
z Items labeled with a [
configured by turning the [
] icon can be
] dial.
Index
Confirm your choice and exit.
4
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
30
Choose a menu item.
3
Before Use
Menu Screen
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
z For menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
Access the menu screen.
1
]
z Press the [
] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
Choose a tab.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identified in this
guide by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
Choose an option.
4
z When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z When options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
]
z Move the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [ ][
]
buttons or turn the [
the page tab.
] dial to choose
Confirm your choice and exit.
5
z Press the [ ] button to confirm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
] button in step 1.
] button to return to the
Accessories
[
Appendix
●
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Index
Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
31
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
On-Screen Keyboard
● To choose tabs, press the [
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
] button to access the menu screen,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are
using.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
Entering Characters
Camera Basics
( )
1
z Touch the characters to enter them.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
Moving the Cursor
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Touch [ ][ ].
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [
] instead of pressing the
] instead of pressing the
] instead of pressing the
Entering Line Breaks
[
] button, if you prefer.
z Touch [ ].
● When [
[
] is shown, you can touch [
] button, if you prefer.
Switching Input Modes
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[
] button, if you prefer.
[
].
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
Accessories
z Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Appendix
Deleting Characters
Index
z Touch [
] to delete the previous
character.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete five
characters at a time.
32
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
Before Use
Indicator Display
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
depending on the camera status.
z Press the [
] button.
●
●
For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
Indicator
Color
Camera Status
Status
Blinking
On
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
Camera Basics
Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons or turning the [ ] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [ ] button. You can also move the cursor by
]
Green
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
turning the [
] button.
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Orange
Charging via USB
●
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera. Doing
so may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Before Use
Clock
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [ ] button.
z The current time appears.
z Clock display switches to vertical
orientation when the camera is held
vertically while the clock is displayed.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To change the display color, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
●
To display the clock when the camera is off, press and hold the
] button, and then press the power button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
Accessories
Appendix
Index
34
Before Use
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
Enter [
] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
2
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
Accessories
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Appendix
Index
35
Zoom in or out, as needed.
3
2) Shoot.
Before Use
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
( )
1
Camera Basics
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
4
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
( )
1
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your finger
Accessories
off the movie button.
z If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
Appendix
Index
36
Compose the shot.
2) Adjust how the shot is composed,
as needed.
2
Before Use
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
focus.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
Camera Basics
Shoot.
3
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3) Stop recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
●
●
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, because
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
] mode, or
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
●
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
Accessories
(
Appendix
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Index
(
37
Still Images
Before Use
●
●
●
Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
] for
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
●
●
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
Camera Basics
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
are changed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
●
●
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
●
No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
●
You can change how long images are displayed after shots
Still Images/Movies
(
Accessories
●
If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [ ] button. To activate
sounds, press the [ ] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Disable].
Appendix
Index
38
Movies
Scene Icons
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Before movie recording, lower the flash with your finger. During
recording, keep your fingers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
muffled.
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Camera Basics
Background
( )
1
Subject
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
People
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Moving People
Shadows on Face
Smiling
●
●
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
–
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
Sleeping
Babies
Smiling Babies
Sleeping Babies
Moving Children
Other Subjects
Other Moving Subjects
●
Audio is recorded in stereo.
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
Other Close-Range
Subjects
2
3
*
*
Index
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
39
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
Before Use
The camera shoots continuously when you take a shot while an icon
for one of the following scenes is displayed. Pressing the shutter button
halfway while one of the scene icons is displayed shows another icon
([ ], [ ], or [ ]) indicating the type of continuous shooting to be used.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Camera Basics
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
Sleeping
(including Babies)
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Children
●
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
●
●
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
Accessories
Appendix
●
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
] dial).
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Index
[
40
Image Stabilization Icons
On-Screen Frames
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
detected as the main subject. Frames follow moving subjects within a
certain range as they are tracked to keep them in focus.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Camera Basics
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For movies, [
applied.
] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
Accessories
●
●
Appendix
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
[
] is not available in [
] mode.
Index
41
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
●
> [Digital Zoom] > [Off].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Zooming with the Continuous Ring
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 12x enlargement.
Camera Basics
Use the continuous ring for finer subject resizing and faster zooming than
with the zoom lever.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
1
z Turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise to
zoom in or clockwise to zoom out.
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
( )
1
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
2
Using the Self-Timer
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
Configure the setting.
1
●
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Appendix
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
Index
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●
Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
achieved by following step 1.
42
Shoot.
2
Customizing the Self-Timer
Before Use
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
Choose [ ].
1
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
]
Camera Basics
button.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel shooting after the self-timer
has been triggered, press the [
button.
delay time or number of shots.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a value, and then press the
] button twice.
]
z To restore the original setting, choose [
in step 1.
]
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Still Images
Movies
(
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
●
For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
Accessories
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●
●
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and color tone
are determined by the first shot. More time is required between
shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take
many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory
card becomes full.
Appendix
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
Index
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
43
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Continuous Shooting
Before Use
Still Images
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
In [
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
Enable the touch-shutter function.
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] or
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
z Press the [
] button and choose
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
]
[
2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] or
[
] is displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
2
z Touch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
●
During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
Accessories
●
●
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Appendix
●
Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
●
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
Index
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the first shot.
44
Registering Face ID Information
Before Use
Shooting with Face ID
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
Access the setting screen.
1
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to find shots you have taken that include
z Press the [
] button, choose [Face
Camera Basics
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Personal Information
● The camera stores face information (face images) registered using
Face ID, as well as entered personal information (names and
birthdays). Additionally, when registered people are detected, their
names will be recorded in still images. For this reason, after using
Face ID functions, be careful when giving the camera or images to
others, or when posting images online where many people can view
them.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
Register face information.
2
Accessories
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
Appendix
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
Index
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
45
Continue registering face
information.
z After [Register?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
5
Before Use
[
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
The flash will not fire when following step 2.
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
(
] mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
●
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
]
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Shooting
Save the settings.
4
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
Accessories
[
z When you point the camera toward
people, the name of the person detected
as the main subject is displayed.
Appendix
[
choose [Yes], and then press the [
button.
]
z Shoot.
Index
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
46
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Before Use
●
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
1
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
●
●
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
Edit Info].
Camera Basics
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
2
●
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [
button.
]
●
●
Because faces of babies and children change as they grow, you
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Check or edit the information as
needed.
3
●
If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
●
●
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
[
] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
recorded in the same position as the first shot, even if subjects
move.
Accessories
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
Appendix
[
] button. To erase face information,
press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
Index
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][
]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
47
Choose the face info to overwrite.
3
Before Use
●
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
previously shot images will remain the same.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children,
because their faces change as they grow.
As long as all 5 face info slots have not been filled, you can also add face
information.
Register face information.
4
Camera Basics
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
1
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Info].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
2
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[
] button.
z If five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
Accessories
Appendix
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Index
48
Erasing Registered Information
Before Use
Image Customization Features
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Movies
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
1
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Camera Basics
Info].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a person to erase their
information.
2
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
●
●
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Accessories
Square aspect ratio.
Appendix
●
●
Not available in [
] mode.
Index
> [ 1] tab > [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
49
Capturing in RAW Format
Changing Image Quality
Before Use
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality and
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to
their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may
JPEG
Images
(
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
also cause some loss of image quality.
Camera Basics
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing.
The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
RAW
Images
computer or printing. You must first process it on this
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality during processing.
●
[
] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more fit on a memory card. Note
that [ ]-size images are of [ ] quality.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [ ] option.
●
●
Not available in [
] mode.
You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
(
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
Accessories
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
Appendix
●
●
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
Index
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
RAW format.
50
Changing Movie Image Quality
Before Use
●
●
The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
z Press the [ ] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
> [ 1] tab > [Image quality].
Using the Menu
Camera Basics
z Press the [
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
] button, choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
] dial and choose
[
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
For NTSC Video
z When finished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
Image
Number of
Frame Rate
Details
Quality Recording Pixels
1920 x 1080
1920 x 1080
59.94 fps
29.97 fps
●
[RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
For shooting in full HD.
] enables movies
with smoother motion.
[
Accessories
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
23.98 fps
29.97 fps
Appendix
For shooting in HD.
Index
For shooting in standard
definition.
640 x 480
29.97 fps
51
For PAL Video
Before Use
Helpful Shooting Features
Image
Number of
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Frame Rate
50.00 fps
Details
Quality Recording Pixels
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
1920 x 1080
Still Images
Movies
For shooting in full HD.
For shooting in HD.
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
25.00 fps
25.00 fps
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display the electronic level.
1
For shooting in standard
640 x 480
25.00 fps
definition.
z Press the [ ] button several times to
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
display the electronic level.
●
●
Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [
] and
],
[
[
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
Straighten the camera.
2
], and
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
> [ 7] tab > [Movie rec. size].
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
( )
1
( )
2
●
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab > [Shooting
[
Accessories
●
●
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
Appendix
Index
●
●
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
Not available in [ ] mode.
52
Deactivating Auto Level
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose
[Disable].
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [
[
] button, choose
Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
Camera Basics
z Choose [Disable], and press the [
]
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
[
] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
] button, and then press the [ ][
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
Continuous
Off
Deactivates image stabilization.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Before Use
Customizing Camera Operation
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of significant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto level.
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Set [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
The lamp lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions. This lamp can be deactivated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist beam firing] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Disable].
Settings] screen.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
●
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).
]
Accessories
Appendix
Index
54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
A red-eye reduction lamp lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is
used in low-light shots. This lamp can be deactivated.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
Camera Basics
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
1
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Hold
Off
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
No image display after shots.
●
By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
55
Before Use
Specific Scenes
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
Camera Basics
and turn the mode dial to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
Other Shooting Modes
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
●
You can also choose a shooting mode by touching [ ] in the
upper left after you set the mode dial to [ ].
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Appendix
Index
56
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Before Use
●
●
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
●
●
●
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
●
●
●
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
z Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
z This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
(
ꢀ
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
z Vivid shots of fireworks.
Movies
Accessories
Appendix
Index
57
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Before Use
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focus range, and then touching it again.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range
Still Images
Movies
Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
Camera Basics
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
compensating filter.
Configure the setting.
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Choose [ ].
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z Press the [ ] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
Choose white balance.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
] in the menu.
[
Shoot.
2
Focus Range
Description
Adjust the setting.
3
Underwater Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
Macro
even closer shots.
correction level for B and A, and then
press the [ ] button.
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some distance
away. Especially effective for moving subjects.
Quick
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Accessories
Manual
focus
●
●
B represents blue and A, amber.
White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
Appendix
preceding steps.
Index
●
●
In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
In [ ] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
●
58
Before Use
Item
Details
Applying Special Effects
Choose from [
defocusing.
] or one of five levels of background
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Choose from five levels of brightness.
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
Choose from five levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
Camera Basics
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
Choose [ ].
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Open the screen.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
( )
2
●
●
In [ ] flash mode, background defocusing is set to [
] and
z Open the screen as shown.
cannot be changed.
In [ ] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ], or
by selecting [ ] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
( )
1
Configure the setting.
3
z On the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to configure.
Accessories
Appendix
z Choose the desired option.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
Index
[
].
Shoot.
4
59
Making Skin Look Smoother (Smooth Skin)
Shooting Panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can enhance skin tone to make it look smoother.
Create a panorama combining shots captured continuously as you move
the camera one direction while holding the shutter button all the way
down.
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Enter [
] mode.
Camera Basics
1
(
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an effect level.
(
].
2
z Press the [ ] button.
Choose a shooting direction.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an effect level, and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ] button and choose the
direction you will shoot.
z An arrow is displayed showing the
direction to move the camera.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Focus.
3
Shoot.
3
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
●
●
Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
( )
2
Shoot.
4
z Holding the shutter button all the way
down, move the camera at a constant
speed in the direction of the arrow.
Accessories
z The area displayed clearly (1) is
Appendix
captured.
z A shooting progress indicator is displayed
(2).
( )
1
Index
z Shooting stops when you release the
shutter button, or when the progress
indicator is completely blue.
60
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the
Background (Panning)
Before Use
●
●
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting may stop midway if you move the camera too slowly or
quickly. However, the panorama created up to that point will still
be saved.
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can blur the background to convey a sense of speed. The
camera will detect and correct subject blurring, so the subject will remain
relatively clear and sharp.
●
Images created from shots in [
] mode are large. Use a
computer or other device to reduce panorama images if you will
print them by inserting a memory card in a Canon printer.
If panoramas are not compatible with certain software or Web
services, try resizing them on a computer.
Camera Basics
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shoot.
●
The following subjects and scenes may not be stitched correctly.
- Subjects that are moving
2
z Before shooting, press the shutter button
halfway as you move the camera so that
it follows the subject.
- Subjects that are nearby
- Scenes where the contrast varies greatly
- Scenes with long stretches of the same color or pattern, such
as the sea or sky
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Keep the moving subject in the frame
displayed, and press the shutter button all
the way down.
z Even after you have pressed the shutter
button fully, continue moving the camera
to follow the subject.
●
You can also set the shooting direction by touching [ ].
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
●
To adjust the effect level, turn the [
] dial.
You can move the frame by dragging it or touching the screen.
For best results, hold the camera securely in both hands, with
your elbows close to your body, and rotate your whole body to
follow the subject.
Index
●
This feature is more effective for subjects moving horizontally,
such as cars or trains.
61
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Choose [ ].
1
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Camera Basics
(
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an effect level.
2
Choose an effect level.
2
z Turn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
z Turn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
62
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
Choose [ ].
1
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Camera Basics
(
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an effect level.
2
Choose an effect level.
2
z Turn the [
] dial to choose an effect
level.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
3
Shoot.
3
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
63
Shots Resembling Watercolors
(Water Painting Effect)
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera, with
vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and modified color overall.
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
].
Choose an effect level.
2
Choose a color tone.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
z Turn the [
tone.
] dial to choose a color
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
Shoot.
3
Standard
Warm
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
Cool
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
Accessories
desired results.
Appendix
Index
64
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Speed
Playback Time
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
Choose [ ].
1
●
●
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose the area to keep in focus.
2
●
●
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
]
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
●
●
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
3
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] and [ ] at
Accessories
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
z Turn the [
] dial to choose the speed.
Appendix
Index
●
You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
4
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
65
Adding Artistic Effects
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Before Use
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
Still Images
Movies
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect.
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Choose [ ].
1
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Art Bold
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Shoot.
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
2
Art Embossed
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Subjects are displayed larger than in other modes.
Accessories
●
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
Appendix
Index
●
●
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
●
[
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
66
Before Use
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Star Emphasis] > [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Camera Basics
●
Still Images
Movies
specify the focal position before shooting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [ ].
1
Still Images
Movies
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
(
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
[
] button.
Choose [ ].
1
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
press the [ ] button.
Secure the camera.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
[
] button.
Accessories
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Shoot.
3
Appendix
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
2
Index
z Turn the [
] dial to choose the
shooting duration.
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
67
Secure the camera.
3
Recording Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Before Use
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
Camera Basics
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note that
cancellation may take up to about 30
seconds.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
●
●
If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
[
] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Configure movie settings.
2
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
]
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
specify the focal position before shooting.
Secure the camera.
3
Accessories
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
Index
68
Check the brightness.
4
Before Use
Item
Options
Details
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
You can choose to save each
shot collected before the movie
is created. Note that when
[Enable] is selected, [Effect] is
not available.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Save Stills
check image brightness.
Enable, Disable
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
Choose movie effects, such as
star trails.
Effect
Camera Basics
Choose the interval between
each shot.
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shot Interval
,
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Shoot.
5
Frame Rate
Choose the movie frame rate.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
Choose the length of the
recording session. To record
until the battery runs out,
choose [Unlimited].
Shooting
Time
60 min., 90 min.,
Unlimited
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
Choose whether exposure is
determined by the first shot or
adjusted for each shot.
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot,
For each shot
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate
(for a one-hour session)
Frame Rate
Interval between Shots
Playback Time
16 sec.
Accessories
NTSC
PAL
15 sec.
15 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
Appendix
8 sec.
8 sec.
4 sec.
4 sec.
2 sec.
Index
1 min.
69
Adjusting Colors
Before Use
●
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
Choose a shooting mode.
1
●
A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
[
Camera Basics
Choose color adjustment.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Sound is not recorded.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
Adjust the setting.
3
(
Images saved with [Save Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
z Turn the [
] dial or press the [ ][
]
as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
careful when erasing images.
●
●
●
●
●
B represents blue and A, amber.
Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
the group.
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
temporarily ungrouped.
Accessories
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
●
The following actions are not available for grouped images:
Appendix
(
(
Index
●
specify the focal position before shooting.
70
Adjusting the Focus
Before Use
●
●
The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
- There is a bright light source
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
Choose a shooting mode.
1
If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
[
Camera Basics
Secure the camera.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Frame the stars to capture.
3
z Press the [ ] button.
z Tilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjust the focus.
4
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
Appendix
z Adjustment may take about 15
seconds. Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
Index
z Press the [ ] button.
5
71
Locking or Changing Image Brightness
Before Use
Recording Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in
1/3-stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
Lock the exposure.
1
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
Camera Basics
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z To unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Adjust the exposure.
2
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the exposure compensation dial.
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure the settings to suit the
2
Shoot.
3
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Accessories
●
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
Appendix
Index
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes, and subjects are enlarged more
than for [Standard].
z Press the [
Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
] button, choose
[
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
Camera Basics
(
[High].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
Auto slow shutter is only available for [
movies.
] and [
]
Accessories
Appendix
Index
73
Sound Settings
Recording Short Clips
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.
Enter [ ] mode.
Camera Basics
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then press
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
Using the Attenuator
2
Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion by automatically activating and
deactivating the attenuator to suit shooting conditions. The attenuator can
also be set to [On] or [Off] manually.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [
] dial to set
z Press the [
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
] button, choose
3
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Effects
2x
Playback in fast motion
Index
1x
Playback at normal speed
Playback in slow motion
1/2x
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
74
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
(Time-Lapse Movie)
Before Use
●
●
Sound is not recorded in these clips.
The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
] (for PAL)
During [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
Still Images
Movies
●
Time-lapse movies combine images that are shot automatically at a
specified interval. Any gradual changes of the subject (such as changes in
a landscape) are played back in fast motion. You can adjust the shooting
interval and number of shots.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure movie settings.
2
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial to choose an item. Choose
the desired option, and then press the
] button.
[
Accessories
Secure the camera.
3
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
Shoot.
4
Index
z To start shooting, press the movie button.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
75
Before Use
Item
Details
Shooting scene
Choose from three types of scenes.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose the shooting interval (in seconds) and total
number of shots.
Interval/ Shots
Choose whether exposure is determined by the first
shot or adjusted for each shot.
Exposure
Camera Basics
Review image
Display the previous shot for up to 2 seconds.
Length of the recording session. Varies depending
on the shooting interval and number of shots.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Time required
- Scene 1: Up to 1 hour
- Scene 2 or 3: Up to 2 hours
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback time of the movie created from captured
still images.
Playback time
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
Fast-moving subjects may look distorted in movies.
●
●
Sound is not recorded.
Focus remains constant during shooting, after it is determined for
the first shot.
●
●
The movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
The time-lapse movie frame rate is automatically set to [
]
for NTSC or [
●
Accessories
> [ 7] tab > [Time-lapse movie settings].
Appendix
Index
76
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customize the settings as desired
2
P Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
●
●
If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
which may enable optimum exposure.
Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
recording.
(
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Accessories
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
Appendix
(
Index
77
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Lock the exposure.
1
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
z [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To unlock AE, press the [ ] button again.
[
] is no longer displayed.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
AE: Auto Exposure
Deactivating Exposure Simulation
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
(Program Shift).
] dial
Images are displayed at a brightness simulating the actual brightness as
captured. For this reason, screen brightness is also adjusted in response
to changes in exposure compensation. This feature can be disabled to
keep the screen at a brightness convenient for shooting, unaffected by
exposure compensation.
z Press the [
simulation] on the [ 1] tab, and then
] button, choose [Expo.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
78
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Changing the Metering Method
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Set the metering method to [ ].
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
].
[
Camera Basics
(
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Configure the setting.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match
the shooting conditions.
Evaluative
metering
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Spot metering
●
Determines the average brightness of light
Center-weighted across the entire image area, calculated by
average
treating brightness in the central area as more
important.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Changing the ISO Speed
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [25600], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose [ISO
(
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
Configure the setting.
2
●
●
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the flash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO speed NR)
[
5] tab > [ISO speed] > [ISO Speed].
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Accessories
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
Appendix
Index
80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND filter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in
1/3-stop increments.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
(
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
ND: Neutral Density
●
●
Accessories
●
●
●
Appendix
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
Index
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
(
]
(
81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
With [D+], ISO speeds lower than [160] are not available. Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
●
●
This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
When the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
Images may still be bright or the effect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specified brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
●
> [ 5] tab > [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Accessories
To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ] and [
modes, press the [ ] button on the Auto Lighting Optimizer
setting screen to add a [ ] mark to [Disable during man expo].
]
Appendix
Index
82
Custom White Balance
Before Use
Image Colors
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot a white object.
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
1
Camera Basics
z Aim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
fills the screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Choose [Custom WB].
2
z Choose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Auto
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
Daylight
Shade
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
For shooting in the shade.
Load the white data.
3
z Select your image from step 1, and then
press [ ].
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Tungsten light
z On the confirmation screen, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], press
White
fluorescent light
the [ ] button, and then press the [
button again.
]
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Accessories
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
z Press the [
menu.
] button to close the
Appendix
Underwater
For shooting underwater.
Choose [ ].
For manually setting a custom white balance
Index
4
Custom
For manually setting a white balance color
choose [ ].
Color temp.
83
Configure advanced settings.
2
Before Use
●
●
Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
z To configure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
[
[
][ ] dials or pressing the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To reset the correction level, press the
] button.
●
●
Camera Basics
[
If [Set WB to “
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
].
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
●
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
Manually Correcting White Balance
●
●
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
Still Images
Movies
You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color-
compensating filter.
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
] or
[
●
●
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter
density)
Accessories
Configure the setting.
1
Appendix
choose [ ].
> [ 6] tab > [WB correction].
Index
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
84
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
Choose a Picture Style with color settings that express moods or
subjects well. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each can be further
customized.
choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and choose the desired option
] in
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Color temperature can be set at 100 K increments in a range of
2,500 – 10,000 K.
The color tone is adjusted automatically to suit the
scene. The colors look vivid, especially for blue
skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes.
Auto
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable
for most scenes.
Standard
Portrait
For smooth skin tones, with slightly less
sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits. To modify
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and
crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes.
Landscape
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of fine subject contours
and subtle textures. Makes images slightly more
vivid.
Accessories
Appendix
For retouching later on a computer. Makes
images subdued, with lower contrast and natural
color tones.
Neutral
Faithful
Index
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully
reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature
of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with lower
contrast.
85
Adjust skin color tone. Choose lower
values to produce redder hues, or higher
values to produce yellower hues.
Monochrome Creates black and white images.
Add a new style based on presets such as
Before Use
Color tone*1
Filter effect*2
Toning effect*2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
User Def.
[Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style file,
Emphasize white clouds, the green of
trees, or other colors in monochrome
images.
N: Normal black-and-white image with
no filter effects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural,
and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.
The sunset will look more brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall
leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear
muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
●
●
Default [Auto] settings are used for [
until you add a Picture Style.
], [
], and [
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
> [ 6] tab > [Picture Style].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customizing Picture Styles
Customize these Picture Style settings as needed.
Adjust the level of edge enhancement.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose lower values to soften (blur)
subjects, or higher values to sharpen
them.
Strength
Fineness
Choose from the following monochrome
hues: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
Indicates the edge thinness that
enhancement applies to. Choose lower
values for more enhanced details.
*1 Not available with [
*2 Only available with [
].
].
Sharpness
Contrast threshold between edges
and surrounding image areas, which
determines edge enhancement. Choose
lower values to enhance edges that do
not stand out much from surrounding
areas. Note that with lower values, noise
may also be emphasized.
●
In [Sharpness], [Fineness] and [Threshold] settings are not
applied to movies.
Accessories
Threshold
Appendix
Adjust the contrast. Choose lower values
to decrease the contrast, or higher
values to increase it.
Index
Contrast
Adjust the intensity of colors. Choose
lower values to make colors faded, or
higher values to make them deeper.
Saturation*1
86
Access the setting screen.
Select a style to modify.
1
2
Before Use
z Choose a Picture Style as described
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial to choose the Picture Style that
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
serves as the basis.
z Press the [ ] button.
Customize the style.
3
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item to modify, and then customize it,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then choose an option by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] dial.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
z To undo any changes, press the [
button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Picture Styles saved on a computer to the camera. For instructions,
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
refer to the CameraWindow Help.
●
[Filter effect] results are more noticeable with higher [Contrast]
values.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
You can also choose a Picture Style to modify by touching [
in step 2.
]
Saving Customized Picture Styles
Save presets (such as [
] or [
]) that you have customized as new
styles. You can create several Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness or contrast.
Select a user-defined style number.
1
Accessories
z Choose [
], [
], or [
] as
Appendix
z Press the [ ] button.
Index
87
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Before Use
Shooting Range and Focusing
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
Still Images
Movies
]
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 72 mm (35mm film
equivalent).
Camera Basics
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
Choose a focal length.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To change the focal length from
24 to 28 mm, turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
●
●
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [ ] ring.
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 72 mm by turning it clockwise.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
88
Fine-tune the focus.
3
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Before Use
z Press the shutter button halfway or touch
] to have the camera fine-tune the
Still Images
Movies
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
focal position (Safety MF).
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near
z To cancel manual focus, choose [ ] in
step 1.
Camera Basics
●
●
AF] and cannot be changed.
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z [ ] and the MF indicator are displayed.
●
●
●
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
Specify the general focal position.
2
You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the general
focal position, and then press the [
button.
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
[Safety MF] > [Off].
]
( )
1
z To adjust the magnification, press the [
button.
]
●
●
You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
z During magnified display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the [
button and then the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [ ].
Accessories
]
[
] is then displayed.
Appendix
Index
89
Configure the setting.
2
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
●
●
z Press the [
] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
●
●
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
Configure the setting.
2
(
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
]
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
Accessories
Choose [ ].
1
Appendix
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
Index
90
1-point AF
Digital Tele-Converter
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
●
A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
●
To return the AF frame to the original position in the center, keep
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
the [
] button held down.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and choose the desired option
] in
Move the AF frame.
Accessories
1
z Pressing the [ ] button displays the AF
frame in orange.
(
Appendix
z Turn the [ ] or [
] dial to move the
AF frame, and press the [ ][ ][ ][
]
Index
buttons to fine-tune the position.
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
button.
●
]
> [ 3] tab > [AF method].
91
Resize the AF frame.
2
Before Use
●
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
original size.
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
Focusing is not possible on faces detected at the edge of the
screen (which are displayed with gray frames), even when you
press the shutter button halfway.
●
●
Finish the setup process.
3
z Press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
●
●
AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Smooth Zone AF
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The camera focuses within your designated area. Effective when the
subject is hard to capture with [ +Tracking] or [1-point AF], because
you can specify where to focus. The camera will focus within the white
frame displayed. You can move the white frame by dragging it or
touching the screen.
You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
center by holding down the [
] button.
●
●
You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
(
● When you press the shutter button halfway, green frames are
displayed around positions in focus within the white frame.
●
●
A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the face of the main subject as determined by the camera. You
Blue frames are displayed around positions in focus when you
Accessories
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
Appendix
● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
Index
● When no faces are detected, pressing the shutter button halfway
displays green frames around other areas in focus.
92
Shooting with Servo AF
Before Use
●
●
Exposure is not locked in Servo AF mode when you press the
shutter button halfway but is determined the moment you shoot,
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
specifying Servo AF. Note that continuous shooting is slower at
this time.
●
●
Depending on the distance to the subject and the subject’s speed,
the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
> [ 3] tab > [AF operation].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Focus.
2
Changing the Focus Setting
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
The camera may not be able to shoot while focusing, even if you
press the shutter button all the way down. Keep holding down the
shutter button as you follow the subject.
z Press the [
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
] button, choose
●
●
●
A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
SHOT].
Accessories
[Small] will restrict the mode to [ONE SHOT].
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Enable
Disable
Appendix
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Index
●
[Small] will restrict the mode to [Disable].
93
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can fine-tune the focus after autofocusing by turning the continuous
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
ring.
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
1
Configure the setting.
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 3] tab, and then
Enter Face Select mode.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Focus.
2
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
range.
Fine-tune the focus.
3
z If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
z Turn the [ ] ring. Referring to the
on-screen MF indicator (which shows
the distance and focal position) and the
magnified display, turn the [ ] ring to
adjust the focus.
Choose the face to focus on.
3
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z To enlarge or reduce the magnified
display, press the [ ] button.
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
Accessories
z To cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
Appendix
Shoot.
4
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Index
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●
94
Before Use
●
When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
●
●
●
●
If you prefer not to shoot when you touch the screen, choose
[
] > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch Shutter] >
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Camera Basics
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To keep the frame in the same position (where you touched)
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus
on.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
frame pos’n] > [Touch point].
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
1
Shooting with AF Lock
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
Lock the focus.
1
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [ ] and the
MF indicator are displayed.
Accessories
z To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
button again.
Shoot.
3
]
Appendix
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
Index
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●
95
Slow Synchro
Before Use
Flash
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Flash Mode
●
●
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
Still Images
Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
Camera Basics
In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
Lift the flash.
1
2
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Off
z Press the [ ] button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
For shooting without the flash.
]
●
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
●
●
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Lift the flash in advance.
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
Auto
Accessories
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
Appendix
On
Index
Fires for each shot.
96
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Shooting with FE Lock
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
shots.
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]
1
immediately turn the [
] dial to choose
Camera Basics
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
Lock the flash exposure.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z The correction level you specified is now
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
z The flash fires, and when
[
] is displayed, the flash output level is
retained.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z To unlock FE, press the [ ] button again.
[
] is no longer displayed.
choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Safety FE] > [Off].
●
●
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
Compose the shot and shoot.
Control] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
3
as follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
●
FE: Flash Exposure
press the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
97
Changing the Flash Timing
Before Use
Other Settings
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Access the setting screen.
1
Still Images
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
Movies
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
Only].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
1st-curtain
2nd-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
98
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
Camera Basics
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Set the shutter speed.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [
] dial to set the shutter
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
speed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●
●
●
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
flash fires.
respective mode.
Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●
[
]: Time value
99
Before Use
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Camera Basics
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Hold down the mode dial release button
Set the aperture value.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Turn the [
value.
] dial to set the aperture
Configure the setting.
2
z Turn the [
speed (1).
] dial to set the shutter
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture value
(2).
●
Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
z When the ISO speed is fixed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
( ) ( )
1
2
your specified values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [ ] or
( )
3
●
●
[
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
In [ ] and [ ] modes, press the [
( )
4
[
] when the difference from standard
Accessories
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
] button and set
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specified shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
Appendix
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
Index
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
100
Before Use
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
●
●
After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
Image brightness may be affected by Auto Lighting Optimizer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
Specify bulb exposure.
●
1
(
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
●
●
[
]: Manual
Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified
Shoot.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [ ] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
●
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
Accessories
When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Appendix
Index
101
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose from the three flash levels in [
][
][ ] modes.
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
Specify the flash mode.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Flash Mode], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Hold down the mode dial release button
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Manual], and then press
the [ ] button.
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure the settings.
2
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the flash level, and then press the [
z Turn the [
speed.
] dial to set the shutter
]
button.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
z Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
value.
[
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
Shoot.
3
Maximum
z Press the movie button.
Accessories
z You can also adjust settings while
●
●
recording, as described in step 2.
and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Flash Output].
Appendix
follows.
●
Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
Index
press the [
] button.
102
Before Use
Customizing Controls and Display
●
●
When the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], you can also adjust the
exposure before recording by turning the exposure compensation
dial.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When the ISO speed is fixed, an exposure level mark based on
your specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button on the
shooting screen. You can also customize what information is displayed.
Camera Basics
●
●
You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specified shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] in [Shooting information display],
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [ ]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[
] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Accessories
●
●
An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
At least one option must be selected.
Appendix
Index
103
Customizing the Information Displayed
Configuring Touch & Drag AF
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
With Touch & Drag AF, you can move the AF frame by touching or
dragging the screen while looking through the viewfinder.
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [
mark.
]
1
Camera Basics
z Choose [Touch & drag AF settings] on the
]
[
(
2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To see an example of display, press the
] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
Configure the setting.
[
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Choose [Touch & drag AF], select
[Enable], and then press the [ ] button.
●
●
For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] > [Grid display].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
The following settings are available by choosing [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] > [Histogram].
●
●
- Switch from a brightness histogram to an RGB histogram.
- Reduce the size of the histogram displayed.
> [Disable], [Touch & drag AF] is set to [Disable] and cannot be
changed.
AF frames may not be displayed correctly if you switch to
viewfinder display while touching the screen. In this case, lift your
finger and touch the screen again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
104
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations
Assigning Functions to Controls
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
z Choose [Pos’n method] in step 1 of
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [ ] button, [ ] ring, [
dial, or [ ] dial, or assign common functions to the movie button or [
button.
]
and choose the desired option.
]
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
1
z Press the [
] button, choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The AF frame moves to the touched or dragged position on
the screen.
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
Absolute
Relative
The AF frame moves in the direction you drag, by an
amount corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter
where you touch the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
][ ] dials to choose the dial or
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch and
Drag Operations
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
button to assign, and then press the [
button.
]
]
z When assigning the shutter button, [
]
button, [ ] ring, [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the shooting mode or the
] dial, or [ ] dial,
touch area].
z Choose the area that will be available for
this feature.
camera control, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the shooting mode or function,
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
z When assigning the movie button or [
button, press the [ ] button, choose the
function on the screen displayed (either
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
]
Appendix
the [
][ ] dials), and then press the
Index
[
] button.
105
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the [ ] button, after
focusing by pressing the
shutter button halfway.
Before Use
●
●
To restore the default settings to the movie button and [
button, choose [ ] and [ ].
]
[AF/AE lock]
[AE lock/AF]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Icons labeled with a [ ] sign indicate that the function is not
available in the current shooting mode or under current function
conditions.
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the shutter button
halfway, and focusing by
pressing the [ ] button.
●
●
With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
] is displayed on the screen.
the focus, and [
Shutter button or
[ ] button
Camera Basics
With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Operate any camera control other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
Enable focus lock by pressing
the [ ] button.
[AF/AF lock,
no AE lock]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enable exposure
compensation by pressing the
shutter button halfway, and
- Open or close the screen
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
- Raise or lower the flash
[AE/AF, no
AE lock]
●
●
You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
focusing by pressing the [
button.
]
You can still choose the direction to move the camera in [
mode if you assign a function to the [ ] button.
]
Enable configuration of the assigned function in
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode by turning
the [ ] ring, [ ] dial, or [ ] dial.
[
] ring, [
] dial,
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
or [ ] dial
Movie button
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
[
] button
Accessories
Appendix
Index
106
Rearranging Menu Items
Before Use
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
1
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
press the [ ] button.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an icon to move, and then
press the [ ] button.
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [Quick
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
dial to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose [OK]
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an icon, and then press
the [ ] button to label icons you want to
display in the Quick Set menu with [ ].
]
z Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
z Items without a [ ] can be configured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Accessories
Configure the setting.
3
Appendix
z Press the [
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose [OK]
[
Index
●
●
Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
107
Save the settings.
3
Before Use
Saving Shooting Settings
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Register settings], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
]
Still Images
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a custom shooting mode to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Settings That Can Be Saved
● Shooting modes ([ ], [
● Items set in [ ], [ ], [
], [
], and [ ])
●
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
on the screen in step 3, press the [ ] button, and then choose
the custom shooting mode. On the confirmation screen displayed
next, choose [OK] and press the [ ] button.
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
1
To automatically update your saved settings with any changes to
settings that you make while shooting in [
] or [
] mode, set
[Auto update set.] to [Enable] on the screen in step 3.
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
[Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] on the
5] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose
Accessories
[
Appendix
Index
108
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
3
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Sort registered items], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
z Choose a menu item to move (either
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [Add
My Menu tab] on the [ 1] tab, and then
z Press the [
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
●
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
not be available in some shooting modes.
[
z Choose [Set up MYMENU1] on the [ 1]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
You can add up to [ 5] by repeating this process from step 1.
Choosing [Delete all items on tab] on the screen in step 2 will
delete all items added to the tab.
●
●
On the [Select item to register] screen for saving or clearing
items, you can also touch items to select them.
On the [Sort registered items] screen, you can also drag items to
change the display order.
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
]
dial to choose [Select item to register],
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
Appendix
Index
z [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[
] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ] button.
109
Renaming My Menu Tabs
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Rename tab].
Choose an item.
1
1
tab] and press the [ ] button.
My Menu tabs] or [Delete all items], and
then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Change the tab name.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Delete the item.
2
z Use the keyboard displayed to enter the
z Choosing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will
delete all My Menu tabs and restore the
default [ ] tab.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
[
z Choosing [Delete all items] will delete all
items added to tabs [ 1] to [ 5].
Deleting a My Menu Tab
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Customizing My Menu Tab Display
Choose [Delete tab].
Specify which screen is displayed when the [
Shooting mode.
] button is pressed in
1
display], and then choose an item as
desired.
tab] and press the [ ] button.
Delete the item.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Appendix
[
Display the most recent menu, as
shown for your previous operation.
Normal display
Index
Start display from [ ] tab screens.
Restrict display to [ ] tab screens.
Display from My Menu tab
Display only My Menu tab
110
Before Use
Playback
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Enter Playback mode.
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Choose images.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
]
button to enter Playback mode.
●
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Accessories
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Index
z Movies are identified by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
111
Play movies.
3
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
access the movie control panel, press the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
Adjust the volume.
4
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
z You can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
1
Pause playback.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
5
z To pause or resume playback, press the
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
z After the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
z To start movie playback, touch [ ] in step
●
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
White lines indicating the aspect ratio are displayed when you
view RAW images. These lines are shown on the top and bottom
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] and on the left and right
] or [ ].
z To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
Accessories
●
●
tab > [Scroll Display] > [Off].
5]
Appendix
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
z Touch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
5] tab > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
Index
●
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
(
31) and choose your desired effect on the [
5] tab >
drag left or right.
[Transition Effect].
z To resume playback, touch [ ].
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in
112
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Switching Display Modes
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from no information
display to Info display 1 (basic info) and then to Info display 2 – 5 (details).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
Histogram
Camera Basics
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Information displays 2 – 5 include a graph
on the top called a histogram, which
shows the distribution of brightness in
images. The horizontal axis represents
the degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis, how much of the image is at each
level of brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
●
Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. For details on the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Access the setting screen.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
1
z Press the [
[Playback information display] on the
6] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose
Still Images
Movies
z Information display 3 includes an RGB
histogram, showing the distribution
of reds, greens, and blues in images.
The horizontal axis represents R, G,
or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
[
Choose information to display.
2
Accessories
z Choose information to display, and then
press the [ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
Appendix
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
z Still images and movies you shoot can be
geotagged using GPS information (such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation)
from a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
Index
●
An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
(
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Before Use
●
●
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
day of still image shooting as follows.
An RGB histogram can also be shown at the top of information
displays 2 – 5. Choose one of the information display options from
2 to 5 in [Playback information display] on tab [ 6], press the
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
1
[
] button, choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button. Note
that information display 3 will show a brightness histogram on the
bottom of the screen.
z Still images shot in [ ] mode are
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
labeled with [
z Choose a still image labeled with
] and press the [ ] button.
] icon.
●
●
●
The brightness histogram can also be accessed while shooting
(
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Play the digest movie.
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
and then press the [ ] button.
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
●
You can also switch between the RGB histogram and GPS
information display by dragging the lower half of the screen
upward or downward in detailed information display.
●
After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
Accessories
Viewing by Date
Appendix
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
z Press the [
Play Digest Movies] on the [
] button, choose [List/
2] tab,
Index
114
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Navigating through Images in an Index
will be displayed.
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display images in an index.
1
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
3] tab > [Face ID Info] >
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
[Name Display] > [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose an image.
2
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
Appendix
●
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
5] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
115
Choose the first condition.
1
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z In single-image display, press the [
]
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [
button and go to step 3.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
Camera Basics
]
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Choose the second condition and
view the filtered images.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the first condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
z To switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
z When you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
(
Favorites
Shot Date
People
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
View the filtered images.
3
Accessories
Displays images with detected faces.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
Appendix
Still image/Movie
Name
[
Index
z To cancel filtered display, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
]
●
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
116
Choose a condition.
1
Before Use
●
●
To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
z Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [
dial and immediately pressing the [ ][
buttons.
]
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by the
specified amount.
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
z Turn the [
] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
found are no longer shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
Touch-Screen Operations
After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
dragging left or right with two fingers.
Still Images
Movies
Use the front dial to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
Accessories
Jump to Favorites
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Appendix
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Index
Jump 10 Images
Jump 100 Images
117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Before Use
●
During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
that only the first image is displayed, but you can also view the images
individually.
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Choose a grouped image.
Camera Basics
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image labeled with
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
5] tab > [Group Images]
[
].
during individual playback.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
View images in the group
individually.
3
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
] dial will display only images in the
[
group.
Accessories
z To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
Appendix
Index
118
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
4
Before Use
Editing Face ID Information
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Camera Basics
●
●
You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
Changing Names
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button and choose
Erasing Names
[Face ID Info] on the [
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
Choose an image.
2
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
choose an image and press the [
button.
]
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
Accessories
displayed in an image, press the [ ][
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [
button.
]
Appendix
Index
Choose the editing option.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
119
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
z Spread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Magnifying Images
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
Still Images
Movies
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
Camera Basics
Magnify an image.
1
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch [
display.
] to restore single-image
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Double-Touch Magnification
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Quickly touch the screen twice to magnify
the image about 3x.
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
2
( )
1
z To return to single-image display from
magnified display, quickly touch the
screen twice.
z To move the display position, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
Accessories
●
●
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
pressing the [ ] button.
You can check the focus when [
Appendix
] is displayed by pressing
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
Index
120
Viewing Slideshows
Before Use
Protecting Images
Still Images
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [
] button, and then
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and then choose [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial). [ ] is displayed.
] in
] (either
choose [Slideshow] on the [
1] tab
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
] button.
]
Camera Basics
]
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [
is no longer displayed.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
●
●
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
during slideshows.
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
●
●
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
Using the Menu
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
Access the setting screen.
1
●
You can configure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
z Press the [
] button and choose
Accessories
[Protect] on the [
Appendix
●
You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Choose a selection method.
Index
2
z To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
121
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
Choose [Select Range].
1
1
press the [ ] button.
and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
Choose a starting image.
2
2
Auto Mode /
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z Press the [ ] button.
Hybrid Auto Mode
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Protect the image.
3
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Choose an ending image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
3
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
[
image], and then press the [ ] button.
●
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
Accessories
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Appendix
●
●
You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching
Index
z Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
[
].
You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
122
Protect the images.
4
Before Use
Erasing Images
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
●
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Camera Basics
Choose an image to erase.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Erase the image.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Protecting All Images at Once
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
]
Choose [Protect All Images].
1
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Images] and press the [ ] button.
●
For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
Protect the images.
2
choosing [Erase ], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Appendix
[
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Index
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
123
Choosing Images Individually
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
Before Use
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
1
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
2
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
z Press the [
choose [Erase] on the [
] button, and then
1] tab
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Choose a selection method.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Erase the images.
3
z Press the [
message is displayed.
] button. A confirmation
z To return to the menu screen, press the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
[
] button.
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
●
Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
124
Selecting a Range
Before Use
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select Range].
1
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
Choose [ ].
1
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Camera Basics
Choose images.
[
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Erase the images.
3
Rotate the image.
2
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Specifying All Images at Once
●
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
Choose [Select All Images].
1
Using the Menu
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
Accessories
Choose [Rotate].
1
Erase the images.
2
Appendix
z Press the [
[Rotate] on the [
] button and choose
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Index
[
125
Rotate the image.
2
Before Use
Tagging Images as Favorites
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Camera Basics
●
On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to rotate
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
Deactivating Auto Rotation
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
[
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [
Rotate] on the [
] button, choose [Auto
5] tab, and then
Using the Menu
Choose [Favorites].
1
z Press the [
[Favorites] on the [
] button and choose
●
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Accessories
Appendix
Choose an image.
2
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
126
Finish the setup process.
3
Before Use
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
Using Touch Actions Functions
Camera Basics
●
●
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
z Drag across the screen as shown.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
Accessories
Appendix
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, and then
Index
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
6]
127
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
2
Before Use
Editing Still Images
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a function to assign.
]
memory card has sufficient free space.
Camera Basics
Assignable Functions
●
●
●
You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Slideshow
Erase
Start a slideshow.
Erase an image.
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
[
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Protect
Rotate
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate an image.
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Favorites
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a
favorite.
Resizing Images
Next Favorite
Previous Favorite
Next Date
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as
a favorite.
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
Switch to displaying the first image with the next
shooting date.
Choose an image size.
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
Switch to displaying the first image with the previous
shooting date.
Previous Date
(
To Camera
z Press the [ ] button.
Accessories
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
Save the new image.
2
Appendix
z After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
To Web Service
]
Index
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z The image is now saved as a new file.
[
128
Review the new image.
Save as a new image and review.
3
4
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [
] button and follow step
z The saved image is now displayed.
Cropping
Camera Basics
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ].
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
RAW images cannot be edited.
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(
You can also view saved images by touching [Processed img.] on
the screen in step 3.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
2
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Using the Menu
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, turn the
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
Choose [Resize].
1
z Press the [
] button and choose
[
[Resize] on the [
the [ ] button.
Accessories
z To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
Choose an image.
2
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
between aspect ratios ([ ], [
], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
],
[
Index
Choose an image size.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
129
Preview the cropped image.
3
Applying Filter Effects
Before Use
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
], and
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] modes to images and save them as separate images.
[
] button repeatedly.
Choose an effect.
1
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
4
Camera Basics
the menu, and then choose the effect
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
(
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjust the effect as needed.
2
●
●
●
RAW images cannot be edited.
z [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
contrast.
Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative filters
applied.
z [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
defocusing.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z [ ] or [ ]: Touch or drag the bar on the
bottom of the screen to adjust the level of
the effect.
●
●
●
Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
z [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color saturation.
While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
button, choosing [ 3] tab > [Cropping], pressing the [
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.
]
z [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
]
color tone.
z [ ]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
●
Accessories
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
Save as a new image and review.
Appendix
3
z Press the [ ] button.
●
●
You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
Index
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
screen.
Operations are also possible by touching [ ], [ ], [
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
], and
[
130
Save as a new image and review.
4
Before Use
●
●
The same operations are available by pressing the [
]
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
button and choosing [ 2] tab > [Creative filters], choosing an
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
image, and pressing the [ ] button.
[
]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
z The image is now saved as a new file.
the [ ][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [ ][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [
] button and follow step
Camera Basics
●
●
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [ ], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
●
Protected images cannot be overwritten.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
●
You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
corrected image as a separate file.
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
1
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[
Choose an image.
Accessories
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Appendix
Correct the image.
3
Index
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
131
Save the image.
5
Before Use
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
z If you have chosen [ ], press the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
[
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Press the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Process images captured in RAW format on the camera. The original
RAW image is retained, and a copy is saved as a JPEG.
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
Choose a RAW image.
1
Camera Basics
z If you have chosen [ ], press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a RAW image.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, and choose [
in the menu. Choose the desired option
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
]
Brightness adjustment Adjust brightness.
[
] dial).
White balance
Picture Style
Choose a white balance.
Choose a Picture Style.
z When choosing [ ], go to step 5.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Set the processing conditions.
3
Auto Lighting Optimizer Set Auto Lighting Optimizer details.
z If you have chosen [ ], press the [
]
High ISO speed NR
Set noise reduction details.
button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose an option, and then press the
Set the image quality level of the resulting
JPEG image.
Image quality
[
] button.
●
●
●
You can also choose an effect for a selected processing condition
on the screen in step 3 by turning the [ ] dial.
Configure advanced settings.
4
Accessories
z Choose an effect (either press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button to return to the
screen in step 3.
]
For magnified display on the screen in step 3, move the zoom
lever toward [ ].
Appendix
To restore the original settings, on the screen in step 3, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Index
●
●
You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] on the screen in step 4 by pressing the [ ] button.
To compare the current image to the original image before saving
in step 5, press the [ ] button and turn the [ ] dial. To return to
the setting screen, press the [
] button.
132
Selecting a Range
Using the Menu
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select Range].
1
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
[RAW img processing] on the [
] button and choose
3] tab
and press the [ ] button.
(
Camera Basics
Choose images.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Choose a selection method.
2
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Process the images.
3
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
process the images.
Choosing Images Individually
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
Images produced by in-camera processing will not match those
processed with Digital Photo Professional exactly.
Choose [Select].
1
press the [ ] button.
Up to 500 images can be selected at one time.
Choose an image.
2
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
Accessories
(
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Appendix
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Index
z Press the [
] button to go to the
next screen.
Process the image.
3
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
process the image.
133
Review the edited movie.
3
Before Use
Editing Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button. The
[
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
edited movie is now played.
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
]
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
[
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Playback”
then press the [ ] button.
(
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
button.
Save the edited movie.
4
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
( )
1
Specify portions to cut.
2
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
or [ ].
]
z The movie is now saved as a new file.
z To specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[
]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
( )
2
●
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
Accessories
z If you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be
cut.
erased.
●
●
●
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
Appendix
available.
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
Index
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
●
You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
134
Reducing File Sizes
Erasing Movie Chapters
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Select the clip to erase.
Camera Basics
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
play a short movie, and then press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button to access the movie control
Before Compression
,
After Compression
panel.
z To choose the clip, press the [ ][
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [
or [ ], and then press the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
,
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
●
●
[
] and [
] movies cannot be compressed.
]
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
●
Compressing movies to [
] or [
] reduces the file
size while maintaining the same image quality.
Confirm erasure.
3
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Appendix
[
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
Index
●
[
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
135
Choose an image.
1
Before Use
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
z Choose an image in single-image display.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Access the home screen.
2
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choosing Themes for Albums
Preview an album.
3
Press the [ ] button and choose the Story Highlights icon. The home
screen is displayed, and you can choose the theme for the camera to use
when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as the
image displayed before you access the home screen.
Date
Save the album.
4
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
Person’s
name
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
5
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event before
and after the image displayed before you access the home
screen.
Index
Event
Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
Custom
136
Adding Background Music to Albums
Before Use
●
Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
- Short movie clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(
Register background music to a
memory card.
1
Camera Basics
●
●
●
●
Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can also access the Story Highlights home screen by
[Music Settings] and press the [
button.
]
Story Highlights].
To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
Create the album.
2
album.
Accessories
Configure background music
settings.
3
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the desired item, press the
] button, and then press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
]
Index
[
]
137
Save the album.
Choose album elements.
4
3
Before Use
z Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
z Press the [
] button after you
are finished selecting still images or
short clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
Camera Basics
Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
●
●
●
If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose background music.
To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
4
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
and then press the [
] button.
Choose a color effect.
Creating Your Own Albums
5
z On the screen in step 4, choose [Change
Still Images
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
Movies
Color Effect].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [
button.
]
Choose to create a Custom album.
1
Accessories
Save the album.
6
Appendix
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
Choose a selection method.
Index
2
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
138
Before Use
Combining Short Clips
●
You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The
previous stills or clips are labeled with [ ], and multiple images
are displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
●
●
Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
The color effect may not be applied to some images.
Camera Basics
Access the editing screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Short
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Specify clips to combine.
2
z Drag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again.
z Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
z After you are finished selecting clips,
Accessories
press the [
] button.
Appendix
Preview the movie.
3
z Choose [Preview] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
139
Save the movie.
4
Before Use
z Choose [Save], and then press the [
]
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Play the movie.
5
Camera Basics
z Choose [Play Back
Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose the movie to play and press the
] button.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The next time you combine short clips, [Select images based
on previous settings?] is displayed, and you can choose [Yes]
to display the editing screen with clips arranged in the order you
selected them last time.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
screen in step 2.
] on the
To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
●
●
To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
Accessories
●
●
The image quality of movies saved is [ ].
Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Appendix
Index
140
Before Use
Available Wireless Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Camera Basics
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-
Fi functions. Remote live view shooting is also possible from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Wireless Features
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Computers
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service or other Web services to send camera
images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be
sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
●
● Printers
Print images wirelessly on a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP).
● Other Cameras
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Accessories
Using Bluetooth® Features
Appendix
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth low
energy technology*. You can also shoot, view, or geotag images by using
your smartphone as a remote control.
Index
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
141
Sending Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Before Use
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
● Connect via Bluetooth
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
by pairing them. This simplifies transferring images to a smartphone.
Install Camera Connect.
1
Camera Basics
z For Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Register a nickname.
2
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
z Press the power button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
●
Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
nickname.
z To return to [Wireless settings] after
pressing the [
] button, press the
[
] button again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
142
Prepare for pairing.
Transfer images.
3
7
Before Use
z Choose [Bluetooth settings], press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
z The camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
choose [Pairing], and then press the [
button.
]
z On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
z A screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
Camera Basics
z Use the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Start Camera Connect.
4
●
●
Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
because power is consumed even when the camera is off.
Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic
devices is restricted, set [Bluetooth] to [Off], to avoid having the
camera ready for Bluetooth communication even when it is off.
z Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z After the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
Select the camera to connect to.
5
●
Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
z Choose the camera nickname.
[
] Connected, [ ] Disconnected
z Complete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
●
●
You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
Accessories
Complete pairing.
6
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
(
Appendix
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message on the camera, and then press
the [ ] button.
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
Index
z Press the [ ] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
143
Establish the connection.
2
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Before Use
z Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
z Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z The camera screen automatically
changes.
Camera Basics
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also use your
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z The devices are connected automatically.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
Adjust the privacy setting.
3
Install Camera Connect.
1
z When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
z Refer to the smartphone user manual to
choose [Yes], and then press the [
button.
]
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Accessories
z You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
Appendix
Index
144
Send an image.
4
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
●
●
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
Camera Basics
z To end the connection, press the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
Connecting via NFC in Playback Mode
[
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
on.
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
●
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
z After you finish choosing images, press
the [
] button, choose [OK], and
Accessories
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
Appendix
z The images are now sent.
Index
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
z To end the connection, press the
[
[
] button, and then press the
][ ] buttons to choose [OK].
Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
145
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Before Use
●
If during connection a message on the camera requests you
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
Camera Basics
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi
Menu
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
5
Install Camera Connect.
1
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
z For Android smartphones, find Camera
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z In the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Start Camera Connect.
6
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
2
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Select the camera to connect to.
7
Appendix
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
Choose [ ].
3
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
146
Adjust the privacy setting.
8
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
z You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Camera Basics
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
Send an image.
9
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[Target History] > [Off].
To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 4).
]
]
●
●
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
z To end the connection, press the [
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
]
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
Accessories
Prepare for the connection.
1
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
Appendix
Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
Index
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2
147
Choose [Switch Network].
3
Previous Access Points
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z A list of detected access points is
displayed.
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
Camera Basics
4
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point as described
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z For non-WPS access points, follow steps
access point.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Select the camera to connect to.
5
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
6
Accessories
Appendix
settings and send images.
Index
148
Before Use
Saving Images to a Computer
●
To uninstall (remove) the software in Windows, select [Start]
menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the
software for uninstallation.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Preparing to Register a Computer
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via Wi-
Fi, system requirements, and other compatibility information (including
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
Camera Basics
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
For details, check the following website.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
Installing CameraWindow
2
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
Download the software.
1
z Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
Accessories
z Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
Appendix
Follow the instructions displayed.
2
Index
z Double-click the downloaded file to install
it.
●
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
149
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
Before Use
●
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
- Turn on media streaming.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
●
●
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
●
●
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
●
●
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
> [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
Accessories
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
Appendix
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
Index
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
150
Choose [Connect with WPS].
5
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Connect with WPS], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
]
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration (PBC) Method or PIN
Method to set up an access point that supports WPS.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
Choose [WPS (PBC mode)].
6
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [WPS (PBC mode)], and
then press the [ ] button.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
z Press the [ ] button.
Establish the connection.
7
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
z On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
Choose [ ].
3
Choose the target device.
8
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
]
Appendix
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
151
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
9
Before Use
●
●
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
Camera Basics
(
[Target History] > [Off].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
z Driver installation will begin.
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
The PIN code displayed when you choose [WPS (PIN mode)]
in step 6 is to be set in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user
manual included with your access point.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Display CameraWindow.
10
●
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
(
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Import images.
11
Accessories
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Appendix
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Index
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
152
Connecting to Listed Access Points
Before Use
●
●
To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
View the listed access points.
1
z View the listed networks (access points)
●
Camera Basics
Choose an access point.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
Enter the access point password.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
] button.
]
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
[
Choose [Auto].
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
] button.
]
Accessories
[
Appendix
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
Index
153
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notification message for completing linkage
settings.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Registering Web Services
Camera Basics
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
z Press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● To use Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you must
have an account with them. For further details, check the websites for
each Web service you want to register.
Choose [
].
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
], and then
●
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
Accessories
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
3
Appendix
z Read the agreement displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [
button.
Index
]
154
Establish a connection with an
access point.
Check for the notification message.
4
7
Before Use
z Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notification message at the
email address entered in step 5.
z Connect to the access point as described
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ] button on the next screen,
which indicates that notification has been
sent.
Camera Basics
Enter your email address.
5
z [
] now changes to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the page in the notification
message and complete camera link
settings.
8
z Enter your email address, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notification
message.
Enter a four-digit number.
6
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
] button.
z Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
]
[
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
9
z You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
Accessories
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
], and then
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
Appendix
Index
z You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
155
Choose [
].
3
Before Use
●
Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not configured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notification message.
z Press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
], and then
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
●
●
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
Camera Basics
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
configure the setting.
●
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
update the camera settings.
●
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
Uploading Images to Web Services
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
Choose the destination.
2
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
1
z Choose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z From a computer or smartphone, access
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Accessories
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
Appendix
Configure the Web service you want
2
to use.
Index
[
] button.
z On the computer or smartphone, display
the Web service settings screen.
z Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
156
Send an image.
3
Before Use
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
playback screen once [OK] is displayed
after the image is sent.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Choose [ ].
2
You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose [Add a Device].
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Accessories
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
Appendix
Index
157
Connect the printer to the network.
4
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z In the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Camera Basics
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Choose the printer.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
5
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
z Choose the printer name (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
[Target History] > [Off].
[
To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 3).
Choose an image.
6
●
●
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
Access the printing screen.
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
7
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu (either press the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
]
Print the image.
8
Accessories
z For detailed printing instructions, see
Appendix
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the disconnection
confirmation screen (either press the
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
158
Send an image.
4
Before Use
Sending Images to Another Camera
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send and receive images between
them as follows.
]
● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z To end the connection, press the
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
z Press the [ ] button.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
then press the [ ] button.
Choose [ ].
2
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
Choose [Add a Device].
3
●
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
[Target History] > [Off].
●
●
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
z Also follow steps 1 – 3 on the target
camera.
Accessories
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Appendix
Index
159
Choose an image.
2
Before Use
Image Sending Options
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Sending Multiple Images
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Camera Basics
z After you finish choosing images, press
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Select and send].
1
the [
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
] button.
z On the image transfer screen, press the
]
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
send], and then press the [ ] button.
[
Send the images.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
Choose a selection method.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method.
]
[
●
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Accessories
Choose [Select].
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
1
Appendix
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
press the [ ] button.
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Index
160
Choose images.
2
Before Use
●
In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
z To include movies, press the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
Notes on Sending Images
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
Send the images.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
[
Sending Favorite Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
Choose [Favorite Images].
1
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
Accessories
[
] button to remove [ ].
z After you finish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
Appendix
then press the [ ] button.
Index
Send the images.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
[
161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
Before Use
Sending Images Automatically (Image
Sync)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][
]
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
Initial Preparations
● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Movies cannot be resized.
Preparing the Camera
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and configure Image Transfer Utility, free software compatible with
Image Sync.
●
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Add [ ] as a destination.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adding Comments
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
email recipients or social networking services. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web
service.
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
Access the screen for adding
comments.
1
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
z On the image transfer screen, choose
Accessories
[
] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
2
3
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
2
Index
Send the image.
z Press the [
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
] button, choose
●
●
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
]
162
Preparing the Computer
Sending Images
Before Use
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Install Image Transfer Utility.
1
z Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
by following steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
Camera Basics
Send images.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Image Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
[
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Sent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.
Register the camera.
2
Save the images to the computer.
2
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera to send images from.
●
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Accessories
●
●
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
Appendix
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Index
163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
Before Use
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Camera Basics
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
Geotagging Images When You Shoot
●
●
Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged using GPS
information (such as latitude, longitude, and elevation) from a Bluetooth
enabled smartphone. You can review the recorded GPS information on
Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
the locations on a map, with the still images and movies shown next to
them.
●
For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Pair the camera and smartphone via
1
Accessories
Choose [GPS settings].
2
z Press the [
] button, choose [GPS
Appendix
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Index
164
Configure the setting.
3
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Before Use
z Choose [GPS via Mobile], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Enable].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
Shoot.
4
You can take shots or record movies as you view a shooting screen on
your smartphone.
Camera Basics
z The still images and movies you shoot
are now geotagged using smartphone
GPS information, which you can check as
described in “GPS Information Display”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow viewing
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Next time, after starting Camera Connect
on your smartphone, make sure the
camera and smartphone are connected
via Bluetooth before shooting.
Secure the camera.
1
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Connect the camera and
●
●
Images are not geotagged this way unless Camera Connect is
running.
2
The GPS information added to your movie is acquired initially,
when you start shooting.
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
●
●
GPS information cannot be updated unless Wi-Fi is off.
The GPS information added to images in remote live view
shooting is acquired initially, when you switch to a Wi-Fi
connection.
Choose remote live view shooting.
3
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
●
●
Images may not be geotagged if you connect via NFC or
Bluetooth when the camera is off.
z Once the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
Accessories
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Appendix
z At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
Index
Shoot.
4
●
●
GPS acquisition status is indicated by one of the following icons.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
[
] Acquiring, [
] Not acquiring
To check the GPS information acquired from the smartphone,
information display].
165
Shoot and switch images.
4
Before Use
●
●
Focusing may take longer.
z Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
[Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
●
●
Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display. This is convenient if you want to connect
quickly while shooting, or if you will control playback while connected to a
TV.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Prepare the camera.
1
z Set the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
Connect the camera and
2
Accessories
z Make sure that the Bluetooth connection
Appendix
has been established.
Index
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
3
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
z The smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
166
Before Use
Connection
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Configurable Items
Web
Services
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Change Device Nickname]
–
O
O
O
O
Editing Connection Information
(
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
1
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
O
: Configurable
: Not configurable
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing a Device Nickname
device to edit, and then press the [
button.
]
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Choose [Edit a Device].
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
Device Nickname] and press the [
button.
]
z Press the [ ] button to access the
new nickname.
Choose the device to edit.
3
Erasing Connection Information
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
Accessories
Choose the item to edit.
4
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Connection Info] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
[
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
z The connection information will be
erased.
167
Change the nickname.
3
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button to access the
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed
from smartphones connected to the camera.
nickname.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [View Settings] in step 4
Camera Basics
●
●
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
●
For remote live view shooting, choose [On].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose [Wireless settings].
1
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(
Accessories
Choose [Nickname].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
[
Index
168
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default
Before Use
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via
Bluetooth
Return the wireless settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the wireless settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all wireless settings before using this option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Before pairing with a different smartphone, clear the information about any
connected smartphones.
Choose [Wireless settings].
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
1
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button and choose
z Press the [
] button and choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
[
4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
(
settings].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Reset Settings].
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
2
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Check/clear connection
info], and then press the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Restore the default settings.
3
Clear the information.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
z On the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
[
z After [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
z The wireless settings are now reset.
]
Accessories
●
To reset settings other than wireless settings to defaults, choose
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
Appendix
Clear the camera information.
4
Index
z In the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
169
Before Use
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
can be configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for
greater convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Camera Basics
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
Setting Menu
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose the desired option.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
Continuous
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
Auto Reset
cards, or when a new folder is created.
170
Before Use
●
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
●
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
use an empty (or formatted,
Formatting Memory Cards
Camera Basics
●
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
Access the [Format] screen.
1
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
then press the [ ] button.
Choose [OK].
2
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
button to choose [Low Level Format]. A
] icon is displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[
] button.
[
formatting process.
Format the memory card.
3
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
●
●
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message, and then press the [ ] button
to start formatting.
Appendix
of the memory card.
Index
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
z When formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
171
Resetting the Electronic Level
Changing the Video System
Before Use
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
Camera Basics
button.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Electronic Level Calibration
Still Images
Movies
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
level the camera in advance.
z Choose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,
Make sure the camera is level.
1
z Place the camera on a flat surface, such
z To restore the original display, choose
[Off].
as a table.
Calibrate the electronic level.
2
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
●
You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the [
button for at least one second.
]
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
Appendix
Index
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
172
Using Eco Mode
Power-Saving Adjustment
Before Use
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
Adjust the timing of automatic deactivation of the camera, screen, and
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Configure the setting.
1
z Choose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to configure the setting.
Camera Basics
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
[Display Off] and [Auto Power Down] cannot be configured when
Screen Brightness
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
Shoot.
2
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
z Choose [ 2] tab > [Disp. Brightness],
press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
Accessories
●
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness] setting
on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and
hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the
camera.
Appendix
Index
173
Switch to the destination time zone.
3
World Clock
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is now shown on [Time Zone] and
]
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Specify your home time zone.
1
Camera Basics
●
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z When configuring this setting for the first
time, make sure [ Home] is selected,
and then press the [ ] button.
Date and Time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
][ ] buttons.
[
z Press the [ ] button.
Specify your destination.
Lens Retraction Timing
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
the [
immediately after you press the [
[0 sec.].
Accessories
] button, set the retraction timing to
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
Appendix
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
z If necessary, specify daylight saving time
as in step 1.
Index
z Press the [ ] button.
174
Display Language
Adjusting the Volume
Before Use
Change the display language as needed.
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, press the [
button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the volume.
]
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
Customizing Sounds
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
the [
] button.
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
[
] dial to choose an option, press the
] button, and then press the [ ][
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
]
z Choose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Enable].
buttons to change the sound.
●
The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
] mode
(
Accessories
Start-Up Screen
●
●
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [
button as you turn the camera on.
]
Appendix
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an option.
175
Hiding Hints and Tips
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Before Use
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
z Choose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
Checking Certification Logos
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Mode icon size/info] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Choose [Certification Logo Display] on
the [ 5] tab, and then press the [
button.
]
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Accessories
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
z Choose [ 4] tab > [Touch Operation], and
Appendix
then choose the desired option.
z To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Index
176
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
Adjusting Other Settings
Before Use
The following settings can also be adjusted.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [
]
Restoring Default Camera Settings
button to access the keyboard, and enter
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Restoring All Camera Defaults
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
1
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
●
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Basic settings], and then press
the [ ] button.
Restore default settings.
2
Deleting All Copyright Information
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Accessories
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z All camera defaults are now restored.
[
Appendix
Index
Info].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
●
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
177
Restore default settings.
3
Before Use
●
The following functions are not restored to default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
(
z Default function settings are now
restored.
- [ 3] tab setting [Language
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
● User settings for custom shooting modes
● Copyright information
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Calibrated value for the electronic level
● Face ID information
● Wireless settings
Access the [Other settings] screen.
1
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Other settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
Choose the function to reset.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the function to reset, and
then press the [ ] button.
]
178
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
Before Use
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Accessories
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
179
Before Use
System Map
Flash Units
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Included Accessories
Neck Strap
Lens Cap
Speedlite*4
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/430EX III-RT/
430EX III/430EX II/270EX II
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cases
Strap Adapter
Lens Cap Cord
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Waterproof Case
WP-DC56
Other Accessories
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
USB Cable
(camera end: Micro-B)*2
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Timer Remote
Controller
Memory Card
Card Reader
Computer
TC-80N3*5
Lens Accessories
Lens Hood
Cables
Accessories
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
Appendix
TV/Video
System
LH-DC110 (with cap)
Index
Power
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
*4 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX,
430EX, 320EX, 270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2 and ST-E3-RT,
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
*5 Requires Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3.
180
Before Use
Optional Accessories
●
●
The battery charger and compact power adapter can be used in
areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Power Supplies
Camera Basics
Flash Units
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Battery Pack NB-13L
Speedlite 600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/
600EX/430EX III-RT/430EX III/
430EX II/270EX II
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Shoe-mounted flash unit that enables
many styles of flash photography.
Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 430EX,
320EX, 270EX, and 220EX are also
supported.
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
z Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
●
The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that ▲ is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
▲ is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2/ST-E3-RT
Accessories
z Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Appendix
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
Index
z Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
181
Other Accessories
Printers
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Waterproof Case WP-DC56
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
Camera Basics
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect Station CS100
Remote Switch RS-60E3
z A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
z Set a self-timer or interval timer, or
control the camera in other ways.
Note that Remote Controller Adapter
RA-E3 (sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote
controller to the camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Lens Hood LH-DC110 (with cap)
z Prevents extraneous light from entering
the lens and causing flares or ghosting,
which reduce image quality.
Index
182
Turn the camera on.
4
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
z Press the [
] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
z When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
Camera Basics
●
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
quality of [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], or
[
] can be viewed in high definition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
1
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Connect the camera to the TV.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
3
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
183
Charge the battery pack.
3
Charging via USB
Before Use
z CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
The battery pack can be charged without removing it from the camera by
using Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU, both sold separately.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
Insert the battery pack.
1
Camera Basics
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
to open the cover.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
z Follow step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
z The lamp turns off when charging
finishes.
to close the cover.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
2
( )
1
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack
for charging.
( )
2
Accessories
z Insert the larger plug of the interface
Appendix
cable into the compact power adapter.
Index
184
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Before Use
●
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To reduce the amount of extraneous light entering the lens, you can attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC110.
You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Align the lens hood threads with the
camera threads and turn the lens hood in
the direction shown.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
z Make sure not to attach the lens hood too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lens hood and damage the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
●
Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
hood is attached.
● You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Charging
computer, refer to the computer user manual.
● When charging is finished, the indicator on the back of the camera
blinks green. However, the indicator also blinks green if the computer
enters sleep or other modes and charging is interrupted.
Accessories
●
●
Charging stops and the indicator goes off if, after you begin
charging, you press the power button to turn the camera off.
With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
Appendix
port.
(
Index
185
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Using a Timer Remote Controller
(Sold Separately)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
To set a self-timer or interval timer or control the camera in other
ways, you can use optional Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3. This is
convenient in time-lapse photography of blooming flowers, for example.
Note that a remote controller adapter (RA-E3, sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote controller to the camera.
Connect the remote switch.
Camera Basics
1
z Make sure the camera is off.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
●
Also refer to the TC-80N3 instruction manual for additional
information.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the timer remote controller
to the remote controller adapter.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Connect the timer remote controller to the
remote controller adapter as shown.
Shoot.
2
z To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Connect the adapter to the camera.
2
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
adapter plug.
Shoot.
3
Accessories
z Turn the camera on.
z To shoot, operate the timer remote
Appendix
controller.
Index
186
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
3
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Before Use
[
], or [ ].
Still Images
Movies
z In other modes, the flash is adjusted and
fired automatically, as needed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX flash is available.
Configure the external flash.
4
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Camera Basics
●
●
●
This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not
fire at all, in some cases.
z Options already set on the flash itself are
displayed.
Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units)
or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
]
z Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the flash attached
●
Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
●
Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a
Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
Speedlite EX Series
●
●
●
You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button
for at least one second.
Still Images
Movies
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.
[Flash Control] is not available when the 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT,
600EX, or 580EX II has been set up for stroboscopic flash.
320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
Accessories
Attach the flash.
1
z Make sure the camera is off, and then
Appendix
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.
Turn the flash on, and then turn the
camera on.
2
Index
z A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
z The flash pilot lamp will light up when the
flash is ready.
187
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
*2 M mode is used for the flash.
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Before Use
In [ ] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case,
when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to
the flash output level set on the camera.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Using the optional Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural
shadows next to subjects during vertical
shooting.
*3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure
compensation on 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II
Speedlites, the camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
flash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 Configure other options on the flash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/580EX II/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off],
[Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-
curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
Camera Basics
z To keep the screen out of the way of the
bracket, use the screen closed and facing
outward.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
*7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE]
and [Red-Eye Lamp] from [ 5] tab > [Reset camera] > [Basic settings] on the
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Lamp] can be configured. (With
autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external flash units do
], [
], or [ ] mode. In
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
Shooting Mode
Item
Options
Auto*1
Manual*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash Mode
Flash Exp. Comp*3 –3 to +3
Accessories
1/128*5 – 1/1
(in 1/3-stop increments)
Flash Output*4
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Shutter Sync.
Wireless Func.*6
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
Off/Optical/Radio
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
On
Safety FE*7
Off
Clear Flash Settings*8
188
Installing the Software
Before Use
Using the Software
Install the software as described in steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
Saving Images to a Computer
- Import images to your computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
- Add Picture Styles saved on your computer to the camera
Camera Basics
● Image Transfer Utility
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connect the camera to the
computer.
1
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process, and edit RAW images
● Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style files
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Display CameraWindow.
2
Accessories
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Appendix
Index
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
189
Before Use
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
●
●
●
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [
icon in the taskbar.
]
z On the screen displayed, click the change
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
program link of [
].
Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
Camera Basics
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Double-click [
].
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Save the images to the computer.
3
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
Accessories
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
Appendix
Index
190
Choose an image.
4
Before Use
Printing Images
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Print your shots and configure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Access the printing screen.
5
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Easy Print
Print the image.
6
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
] button.
]
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
[
z Printing now begins.
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is finished.
Connect the camera to the printer.
2
z When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
smaller plug fully into the camera terminal
in the orientation shown.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
●
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Turn the printer on.
3
191
Cropping Images before Printing
Configuring Print Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
Access the printing screen.
1
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
Choose [Cropping].
1
(
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Camera Basics
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[
Configure the settings.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
]
] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
Adjust the cropping frame as
2
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
needed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Default
Date
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
z To move the frame, press the
File No.
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
Both
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
–
Off
Default
Off
Print the image.
3
Matches current printer settings.
–
to print.
Accessories
Uses information from the time of shooting
to print under optimal settings.
On
Appendix
●
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Red-Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
Index
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Specify a desired image area to print
–
Cropping
(
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
–
192
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Available Layout Options
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Prints with blank space around the image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Bordered
Choose [Paper Settings].
1
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Camera Basics
ID Photo
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Choose a paper size.
Fixed Size
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose a type of paper.
3
Choose [ID Photo].
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
(
the [ ] button.
Choose the long and short side
length.
2
Choose a layout.
4
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
]
dial to choose an option.
Appendix
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Print the image.
5
to print.
193
Choose the printing area.
3
Movie Printing Options
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Sequence
area.
Camera Basics
Print the image.
4
●
●
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
to print.
After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Printing Movie Scenes
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Access the printing screen.
1
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
Still Images
Movies
(
191) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Choose a printing method.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
Accessories
]
●
RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Appendix
Print the image.
3
Index
to print.
194
Configuring Print Settings
Before Use
●
●
●
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
4] tab, and then press
settings] on the [
the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Still Images
Movies
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and configure items as needed
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
1
(
z Press the [
settings] on the [
the [ ] button.
] button, choose [Print
4] tab, and then press
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Print Type
Index
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
]
Both
On
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
Date
Choose an image.
–
2
Off
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
On
Images are printed with the file number.
File No.
–
Off
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
On
Off
z If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Clear DPOF
data
Accessories
–
Appendix
●
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
Index
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
195
Specify the number of prints.
3
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
]
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Camera Basics
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Accessories
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Index
[
196
Choose an image.
2
Adding Images to a Photobook
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
z [ ] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Camera Basics
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choosing a Selection Method
z When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
z Press the [
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
then choose how you will select images.
] button, choose
4] tab, and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
Adding Images Individually
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
Choose [Select].
1
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
197
Before Use
Troubleshooting
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If
the issue persists, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Power
Camera Basics
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
●
●
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Appendix
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
Helpful information when using the camera
●
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
●
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
The battery pack is swollen.
●
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Customer Support Help Desk.
Accessories
Appendix
Display on a TV
Index
198
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Shooting
Before Use
●
●
●
●
Cannot shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
●
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Camera Basics
●
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
-
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
or LED lighting.
●
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
●
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
[
●
●
●
●
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
●
●
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
White spots appear in flash shots.
●
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots are out of focus.
Shots look grainy.
●
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
Make sure subjects are within focusing range ( 223).
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●
●
=
●
●
●
●
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
Accessories
●
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
Appendix
Shots are blurry.
●
Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
●
Index
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
slower.
●
●
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing
the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before pressing the shutter
button halfway (or pressing it halfway repeatedly).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
●
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
199
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
Playback
Before Use
●
The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
Playback is not possible.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
files or alter the folder structure.
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●
Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
●
●
●
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
Camera Basics
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Shooting Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Sound is not played during movies.
●
in the movie is faint.
(
●
]
(
[
●
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen.
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
●
●
Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
-
-
-
Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.
Zooming is not possible.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
●
●
]
●
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
(
Subjects look distorted.
Accessories
●
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Memory Card
Appendix
The memory card is not recognized.
Index
●
200
Cannot send images.
Computer
Before Use
●
●
●
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
RAW images cannot be sent to the camera or displayed on TV sets. RAW images
selected for transferring to a smartphone are transferred as JPEG images.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
-
Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
●
Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if
you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images
Camera Basics
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
●
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
original size.
Movies cannot be resized.
●
Cannot add a device/destination.
●
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
●
●
●
●
Movies may take a long time to send.
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
●
●
●
●
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
●
Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
Accessories
destination again.
●
Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notification
message.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
Appendix
specify a supported channel manually.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●
Index
201
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
Before Use
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image./No identification information
●
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
No memory card
Camera Basics
●
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Memory card locked
●
The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Invalid selection range
●
Cannot record!
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
●
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
Exceeded selection limit
●
●
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
●
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
(
Insufficient space on card
●
Naming error!
●
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
Touch AF unavailable
●
Accessories
(
Touch AF canceled
Lens Error
●
Appendix
●
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
●
Index
No Image.
●
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
202
A camera error was detected (error number)
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
Before Use
●
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
●
●
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case, write
down the error number (Exx) and contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
●
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
File Error
●
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Sending failed
Memory card error
Camera Basics
●
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Print error
●
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
Ink absorber full
●
Contact a Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber
replacement.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
●
●
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
●
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
●
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Cannot determine access point
●
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
Accessories
Insufficient space on server
●
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
Appendix
No access points found
●
server to your computer.
●
●
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Index
Check network settings
●
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●
IP address conflict
●
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
203
(17) Connected via Bluetooth to a
Before Use
On-Screen Information
smartphone and acquiring GPS
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Information Display)
(20) Recordable shots
(21) Maximum continuous shots
The same information is shown on the viewfinder.
(
)
(
18
)
(
)
Camera Basics
15
40
( )
22
(
17
)
(
)
(
) ( )( ) (
)
( ) ( )
24 25
16
19 20 21
23
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
1
(
)
)
26
(
)
38
(
27
( )
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(24) Remaining time
( )
3
(
28
(
29
)
( )
4
( )
5
( )
6
)
(
) ( ) ( ) (
)
41 42 43 44
( )
7
( )
8
10
12
( )
9
(
(
)
)
(
30
)
(
(
(
)
11
)
13
)
14
(45)
(46)
(
45
) ( ) (
)
( )
48
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
46
47
(
49
)
(
)
39
(
31
)
(
32
)
(
) (
)
(
35
)
(
) (
)
33 34
36 37
(
50
)
(
Accessories
Battery Level
(3) Flash exposure compensation /
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Appendix
Display
Details
Index
Sufficient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
(7) High ISO speed noise reduction
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
(
(15) Bluetooth connection status
[Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
(
204
Info Display 2
During Playback
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Info Display 1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(1) Current image / Total images
(9) Folder number - File number
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
(4) Bluetooth connection status
(
Miniature movie playback speed
(12) Exposure compensation level
(
(
1
(6) Exposure compensation level
(
2
*1 Displayed for images with a creative filter, resizing, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied.
*2 Cropped images are labeled with [ ].
Accessories
(16) High ISO speed noise reduction
(
(10) White balance correction
Appendix
(
(11) Picture Style setting details
Index
(
(20) Recording pixel setting
(21) Image size
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(
* Cropped images are labeled with [ ].
205
Info Display 3
Summary of Movie Control Panel
Before Use
Shows GPS information and an RGB histogram. Information on the top of
the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Info Display 4
Shows white balance information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Play
Camera Basics
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Info Display 5
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Shows Picture Style information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
]
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
Accessories
●
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
Index
206
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
/
Function
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1
*1
*1
*1
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
*2
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
AUTO
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
100 – 25600
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
*3
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*3
O
O
–
*3
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
*4
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Index
Aperture Value
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
Av/Tv Settings
Shutter Speed
Bulb Setting
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 *5 *5 *5
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*5
O
O
O
6
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
207
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
AF Lock by touching during movie recording
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
(
Camera Basics
Optical Zoom
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
AF Lock (when assigned to controls other
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
(
*1
*1
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Focus Range
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
(
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Manual Focus Switching When Recording
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Center
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Move AF Frame
(
Periphery
–
–
*7 *7 *7
*7 *7 *7
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*8
O
–
–
–
–
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
*8
O
–
–
*8 *8
O
O
*8
O
–
Appendix
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Set in [Brightness].
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*4 Adjusted to suit the [Brightness] setting.
*5 Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.
*6 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
*7 Only when [ ] is selected.
*8 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
208
Quick Set Menu
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
/
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
*2
–
O
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
When Set
to NTSC
–
–
–
*3
*3
–
O
–
Movie
rec. size
–
–
(
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
When Set
to PAL
*3
*3
O
O
O
O
O
–
Accessories
–
–
Appendix
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
/
/
Index
Delay*4
–
Custom
Timer
Self-Timer Settings
Shots*5
–
209
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
White balance
/
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
*1
*1
*1
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Metering mode
Appendix
(
/
/
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
Index
Auto Lighting Optimizer
–
–
–
–
–
–
(
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
210
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
–
O
–
*6
–
O
–
Still Image Aspect Ratio
(
–
–
–
O
–
*6
–
*6
–
Camera Basics
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 ] when subject movement is detected.
*4 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*6 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
211
Shooting Tab
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
/
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
–
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
JPEG
/
/
/
/
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RAW
Still Image Aspect Ratio
Screen Custom display 1/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
info/ toggle Custom display 2/
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
settings
No info display
VF info/
toggle
settings
No info display/
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
Off
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
VF vertical
display
O
O
O
O
Accessories
Grid
display
3x3
3x3+diag
/6x4
/
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Brightness/ Brightness/
RGB
RGB
Histogram
Index
Display
size
Large/
Small
Expo.
simulation
Enable
Disable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
(
212
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Reverse
Display
–
On
Off
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(
1
Power
Saving
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Camera Basics
Display Mode Display
(
priority
Smooth *1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
VF display
format
–
Display 1/Display 2 *1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
–
O
–
Off/Hold
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Image review
(
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec. *1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Enable
Disable
*1
*1
Touch
Shutter
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Touch Shutter
(
Center/
Touch
point
AF frame
pos’n
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
Enable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Touch &
drag AF
Disable
O
O
O
O
O
O
Pos’n
method Relative
Absolute/
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Touch & drag
AF settings
Whole
panel/
Right/
Appendix
(
Active
touch
Left/
Index
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Top right/
area
Btm. right/
Top left/
Btm. left
213
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Face ID
Settings
Face ID On/Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(
AF/AE lock
AE lock/AF
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
AF/AF lock, no
AE lock
Shutter/AE lock
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
AE/AF, no AE
lock
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Dials
/
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
button
button
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories
Appendix
Index
214
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
Standard
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Digital Zoom
Off
(
1.6x/2.0x
Camera Basics
AF operation
AF method
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
AF Frame
Size*2
Normal
Small
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(
Enable
Disable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Continuous AF
(
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
AF+MF
–
–
–
–
On/Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
(
–
AF-assist
beam firing
Enable
Disable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories
Appendix
Index
215
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
MF-Point
Zoom
Off
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
5x/10x
On
(
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Safety MF
Camera Basics
(
Off
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
On
Off
Peaking
Level
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
MF Peaking
Settings
Low/
High
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(
Red/
Yellow/
Blue
Color
*1
*1
4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Continuous *1
O
O
IS Mode
Shoot
*1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
IS Settings
Only
(
–
O
–
Low
*1
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
Dynamic
IS
Standard *1
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
High
–
–
–
–
–
–
Enable
Disable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Auto level
(
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
216
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Bracketing
(
/
ISO Speed
Camera Basics
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
Max ISO Speed
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
ISO Auto
Settings
Standard *1
Rate of
Change
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Fast/
*1
–
–
–
O
O
Slow
Highlight
tone priority
Disable
Enable
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
5 *5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Flash Mode
Manual
Flash Exp. Comp
Flash Output
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1st-curtain
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Appendix
Shutter Sync.
2nd-curtain
Index
–
On
Off
On
Off
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Red-Eye Lamp
O
O
–
Safety FE
Color Adjustment
217
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
6 *6
Standard
Low/High
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
High ISO speed NR
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Spot AE Point
Center/
AF Point
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
(
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
Off
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
Safety shift
(
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
218
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Self-Timer
Digest Type
Include Stills/
No Stills
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
(
Camera Basics
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sharp/Soft
O
O
Star Emphasis
(
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save
Stills
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Enable/Disable
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Effect*3
/
/
/
/
Shot
Interval
15 sec./30 sec./
1 min.*4
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Frame
Rate
NTSC:
PAL:
/
–
/
7 *7
Shooting 60 min./90 min./
Time
–
Unlimited
Auto
Lock to 1st shot/
–
exposure For each shot
Shooting Scene 1/Scene 2/
scene
O
Scene 3
Accessories
2-4 sec./
30-900 (Scene 1)
5-10 sec./
30-720 (Scene 2)
11-30 sec./
Interval/
Shots
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
O
30-240 (Scene 3)
Index
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Exposure Fixed/For each shot
O
O
Review
Enable/Disable
image
219
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
Function
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
Auto
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Off
Camera Basics
8
Auto
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Off/On
Enable
Disable
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto slow shutter
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
O
O
O
O
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Only available when the AF method is [1-point AF].
*3 Available when still saving is set to [Disable].
*4 Available when the effect is set to [Off].
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
*5 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [
] mode. Items from the
[
7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode.
*6 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ]. Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes:
[
[
], [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
],
],
], and [ ].
*7 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
], [
[
Accessories
-
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
Appendix
Index
220
Tab
5
Item
Reference Page
Set Up Tab
Before Use
Certification Logo Display
Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)*2
Copyright Info
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Tab
Item
Reference Page
Create Folder
File Numbering
Format
Reset camera*3
*1 Not available in these modes: [
].
*2 Not available in these modes: [
], [
], [
], [ ], [
], [
], [ ], [
], and
Camera Basics
1
[
Video system
Display settings
Electronic level
Start-up Image
Eco Mode
], [
], and [ ].
] modes.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*3 Only [Other settings] is available in [
] and [
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
My Menu Tab
Power Saving
Disp. Brightness
Night Display
Time Zone
Tab
Item
Reference Page
Add My Menu tab
Delete all My Menu tabs
Delete all items
Menu display
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
2
1
Date/Time
Lens Retraction
Language
Mute
Volume
3
4
Accessories
Sound Options
Hints & Tips
Mode icon size/info*1
Touch Operation
Units
Appendix
Index
Wi-Fi connect’n
Wireless settings
GPS settings
221
Playback Tab
Before Use
Handling Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Tab
Item
Reference Page
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Protect
Rotate
Erase
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields. Strong electromagnetic fields
may cause malfunction or erase image data.
1
Camera Basics
Favorites
Slideshow
● The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, memory card/battery cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
Story Highlights
● This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to
help prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from
getting inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt
from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust,
water, and salt to get on the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
List/Play Digest Movies
Short Clip Mix
Image Search
Creative filters
Resize
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If
dirt, dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-
wrung wet cloth.
Cropping
● Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
3
4
Red-Eye Correction
Face ID Info
● Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
RAW img processing
Print settings
Photobook Set-up
Transition Effect
Index Effect
● If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Customer Support Help Desk.
Accessories
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
Appendix
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Index
5
6
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Resume
Image jump w/
Set Touch Actions
Playback information display
222
Shutter
Before Use
Specifications
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings)
Image Sensor
Max. Tv.........................................1 sec.
Min. Tv..........................................1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv.........................................30 sec.
Min. Tv..........................................1/2000 sec.
Image size ........................................APS-C
Camera Effective Pixels
(Pixels may decrease due to image
processing) .........................................Approx. 24.2 megapixels
Total pixels........................................Approx. 25.8 megapixels
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Aperture
Lens
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
F number
Focal Length
Wide angle........................................2.8 - 16.0
Telephoto..........................................5.6 - 16.0
(35mm film equivalent) ..........................15.0 - 45.0 mm (24 - 72 mm)
Zoom Magnification ..........................3x
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Flash
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto
(
)
(
)
Built-in Flash
Flash range (Max. wide angle)
10 cm ‒ infinity
(3.9 in. – infinity)
30 cm ‒ infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
–
closest point..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point.................................Approx. 9.0 m (approx. 29.5 ft.)
Flash range (Telephoto end)
closest point..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point.................................Approx. 4.5 m (approx. 14.8 ft.)
10 cm ‒ infinity
30 cm ‒ infinity
(3.9 in. – infinity)
(11.8 in. – infinity)
Other
modes
10 – 50 cm
–
(3.9 in. ‒ 1.6 ft.)
Accessories
Viewfinder/Monitor
Appendix
Step Zoom........................................24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm,
72 mm
Electronic color viewfinder
Screen Size ......................................0.39 type
Pixels................................................Approx. 2.36 million dots
Index
Monitor
Type..................................................TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size ......................................3.0 type
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 1.04 million dots
223
Shooting
Recording
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Digital zoom
File Format............................................DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Magnification.....................................Approx. 4x
Maximum with optical zoom..............Approx. 12x
Focal Length (Telephoto end,
Data Type
Still Images
35mm film equivalent) ...........................Approx. 288 mm equivalent
Recording Format.........................Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)
Image (RAW images taken while
Camera Basics
Continuous Shooting
Shooting speed*
One-Shot AF
shooting are A/D converted into
12-bit format.) ..................................JPEG/RAW (CR2 a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 9.0 shots/sec.
Servo AF
High-speed Continuous
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Recording Format.........................MP4
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio ............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:
Tv value/Av value/Subject conditions/Brightness/Shooting with flash/Zoom
positions/Battery level
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
224
Power
Interface
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Pack .........................................NB-13L
Number of Still Image
Wired
Digital terminal
(Hi-Speed USB compliant) ....................Micro USB
HDMI OUT terminal ..........................Type D
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 200 shots
Shots (CIPA compliant:
room temperature
23°C / 73°F)
Wireless
Viewfinder On
Approx. 200 shots
Camera Basics
NFC .................................................NFC Forum Type3/4 Tag compliant
(Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards .................Bluetooth Ver. 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Transmission scheme...................GFSK modulation scheme
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards .................IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission frequency
Number of Still Image
Shots (Eco Mode On)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 250 shots
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 45 min.
Movie Recording Time
(CIPA compliant: room
temperature 23°C / 73°F)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Viewfinder On
Approx. 45 min.
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 80 min.
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting)
Viewfinder On
Approx. 80 min.
Approx. 4 hr.
Frequency.................................2.4 GHz
Channels ..................................1 – 11
Security
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Playback Time*
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images
Infrastructure mode .................WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode .....WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ...........................WPA2-PSK (AES)
Accessories
Appendix
Index
225
Operating Environment
Battery Pack NB-13L
Before Use
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Approx. 300 times
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Temperature .........................................Min. 0 °C, max. 40 °C
(Min. 32 °F, max. 104 °F)
Nominal voltage:
Nominal capacity:
Charging cycles:
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant)
Operating temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Camera Basics
W ..........................................................Approx. 115.0 mm (approx. 4.5 in.)
H ...........................................................Approx. 77.9 mm (approx. 3.1 in.)
D ...........................................................Approx. 51.4 mm (approx. 2.0 in.)
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Rated input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Rated output:
Charging time:
Weight (CIPA Compliant)
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Camera Body Only ...............................Approx. 375 g (approx. 13.2 oz.)
Including Battery Pack, Memory Card....Approx. 399 g (approx. 14.1 oz.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.* (when charged with
NB-13L in the camera)
Rated output:
Charging time:
*Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Accessories
● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
Appendix
Index
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
226
Exposure
H
Before Use
Index
Handheld night scene
High dynamic range
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
A
Art bold effect (shooting mode) 63
F
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
I
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 63
Flash
→
Image quality Compression
Images
D
Date/time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
→
Playback Viewing
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
→
Defaults Resetting
Focusing
B
→
Batteries Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery pack
Servo AF 93
J
E
M
Editing
Accessories
Focus range
Editing or erasing connection
Appendix
C
Camera
Menu
Index
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 154
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 65
G
227
Movies
Star nightscape
W
Before Use
Water painting effect
Image quality (recording pixels/
Star time-lapse movie
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
S
Screen
N
→
Neck strap Strap
Camera Basics
→
Menu Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
T
P
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Z
→
Memory cards
Playback Viewing
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Sending images to another
Sending images to Web services 154
Servo AF 93
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
→
→
→
Battery pack
Program AE 77
→
Shooting
→
Shooting date/time Date/time
U
Shooting information
Accessories
Q
V
Appendix
Software
R
Index
RAW 50
228
•
•
•
Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others)
Before Use
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
•
Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions,
and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations.
To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the guidelines
noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss
if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in
this guide.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
•
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical equipment
or other electronic equipment.
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certification labels from the product
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other electronic
equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes bringing
them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in Japan), export
or service transaction permission may be required from the Japanese
government.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
•
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
•
•
Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
Security Precautions
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased due
to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static
electricity, or accident or malfunction.
Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or
indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or
disappearance of content.
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
Accessories
•
Only use networks you are authorized to use.
Appendix
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
•
When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it for
repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings you
have entered.
Index
229
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Before Use
•
Transmission monitoring
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
•
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
LICENSE TERMS
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is
allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built
using this software without specific written permission.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Third-Party Software
•
expat.h
DISCLAIMER
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in
respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or
fitness for purpose.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
Accessories
Appendix
Index
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
230
•
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Personal Information and Security Precautions
Before Use
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or sending
it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the leakage
of such information and settings.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Disclaimer
•
Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the
Face ID settings.
•
•
•
Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset Settings]
in the Wi-Fi settings.
Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Trademarks and Licensing
•
•
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
•
•
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
•
•
•
App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
•
•
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
•
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in
the United States and in other countries.
•
•
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
231
|